F150-3 Vision Sensor Expert Menu Operation Manual

F150-3 Vision Sensor Expert Menu Operation Manual
F150-3 Vision Sensor
Expert Menu Operation Manual
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures
by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in
this manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to
heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
! DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
! WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury, or property
damage.
Visual Aids
The following headings will help you locate different types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
Indicates pages where additional information can be found.
1 Indicates a procedure. The step numbers in the procedure
correspond to the numbers in any related illustrations.
Trademark
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.
Ó OMRON, 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
1 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
SECTION 1
The Expert Menu Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
Measurement Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1-3
1-4
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of F150 Installation and Operation . . . . . .
12
16
1-5
Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
SECTION 2
Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
2-1
2-2
Starting and Quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
22
2-3
Two-camera Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
2-4
Intelligent Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
SECTION 3
Setting Measurement Conditions . . . . . . .
45
3-1
Entering Set Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
3-2
Adjusting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
3-3
Position Displacement Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
3-4
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation
Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Output Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
3-6
3-7
Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing Measurement Conditions
(Clearing Scenes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
SECTION 4
Monitor Mode and Run Mode . . . . . . . . . .
80
135
137
4-1
Confirming Correct Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
4-2
Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
Entering System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Result Output Destinations . . . . . . . . .
Two-camera Unit and Intelligent Light Source . . . . .
Measurement Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Measured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Console Key Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Startup Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Output Method for Error Terminal . . . . . .
Checking the Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
157
158
160
162
169
172
174
175
SECTION 6
Backing Up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
6-1
6-2
Saving/Loading System and Scene Data . . . . . . . . . .
Saving to Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
181
SECTION 7
Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
7-1
7-2
7-3
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing . . . . . . . . . . .
184
187
189
SECTION 8
RS-232C Normal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Results Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
205
207
207
229
SECTION 9
RS-232C Host Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . .
231
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
vi
155
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
241
242
262
265
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 10
CompoBus/D Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
269
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocation Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
278
301
309
315
318
SECTION 11
RS-232C Menu Operation Settings . . . . . .
323
SECTION 12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
327
Appendices
A Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
341
vii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the operation of the F150 Vision Sensor using the Expert Menu
and includes the sections described below. This is one of two manuals used to operate
the F150. Refer to the following table for the contents of each manual.
Contents
Manual
Cat. No.
1: Setup
Manual
Provides information on system hardware and
installation. Be sure to read this manual first.
Z141-E1-1
2: Expert
Menu
Operation
Manual
Describes operation of the F150 using the Expert
Menu. The Expert Menu enables application of all
F150 capabilities, including setting region images
and criteria, and outputting judgement results and
data via the terminal blocks, RS-232C or
CompoBus/D.
Z142-E1-1
Please read the above manuals carefully and be sure you understand the information
provided before attempting to install and operate the F150.
Section 1 The Expert Menu Mode outlines the features of the Expert Menu and explains
what can be achieved using it.
Section 2 Basic Operations describes the overall flow of F150 application and basic
operations.
Section 3 Setting Measurement Conditions describes the settings required for F150
operation.
Section 4 Monitor Mode and Run Mode explains how to check if measurements are
being correctly performed with the set measurement conditions using Monitor mode, and
how to make actual measurements using Run mode.
Section 5 System Settings explains how to set conditions related to the system environment.
Section 6 Backing Up Data explains how to make backup copies of data to flash
memory or a computer.
Section 7 Terminal Block describes the communications settings and I/O formats for
communications with external devices via the terminal blocks.
Section 8 RS-232C Normal Settings describes the communications settings for the
RS-232C port when communications are set for Normal mode.
Section 9 RS-232C Host Link Settings describes the communications settings for the
RS-232C port when communications are in Host Link mode.
Section 10 CompoBus/D Settings describes the communications settings required
when the F150 is used as a CompoBus/D Slave.
Section 11 RS-232C Menu Operation Settings describes the communications settings
for the RS-232C port when communications are in Menu operation mode.
Section 12 Troubleshooting lists the errors that may occur during F150 operation,
along with their probable causes and countermeasures.
Appendix A Version Information describes functions that have been added with this
version and provides details on data compatibility with previous versions.
!
WARNING
Failure to read and understand the information provided in this
manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the
product, or product failure. Please read each section in its
entirety and be sure you understand the information provided
in the section and related sections before attempting any of
the procedures or operations given.
ix
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the F150 Vision Sensor.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable
application of the F150 Vision Sensor. You must read this section and understand the
information contained before attempting to set up or operate a F150 Vision Sensor.
1 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xiii
xi
Safety Precautions
1
Safety Precautions
! Caution Do not touch fluorescent or halogen lights while
the power is ON or immediately after the power is
turned OFF. These lights generate heat and can
cause burns.
! Caution Do not use the F150 in environments with flammable or explosive gases.
! Caution Install the F150 away from high-voltage equipment or motors to ensure safety during operation
and maintenance.
! Caution Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect
bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
! Caution Cover the terminal blocks with the Terminal Block
Protection Covers after wiring.
! Caution Use DC power supplies with safe extra low-volt-
age circuits that prevent occurrences of high voltages in the main F150 power supply and power
supplies for the terminal blocks.
! Caution Use the power supply cables and crimp terminals
of specified sizes.
! Caution Use at the power supply voltages specified in this
manual.
! Caution Be sure to securely tighten the screws when
mounting F150 components.
! Caution Do not dismantle, repair or modify any F150 components.
! Caution Dispose of F150 components as industrial waste.
xii
1
General Precautions
2
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance
specifications described in the relevant manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control
systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety
equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of
the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
xiii
SECTION 1
The Expert Menu Mode
This section outlines the features of the Expert Menu mode and explains what can be
achieved using it. The Expert Menu mode enables use of all the capabilities of the F150.
1-1
1-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
1-2-2
1-2-3
1-2-4
1-2-5
1-2-6
1-2-7
1-2-8
1-3
1-4
1-5
2
4
Binary Center of Gravity and Area . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary Center of Gravity and Axis Angle . . . . . . .
Gray Search and Precise Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gray Edge Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surface Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Density Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relative Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
1-3-1
1-3-2
Without Two-camera Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With Two-camera Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
13
Overview of F150 Installation and Operation . . . . . .
Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
17
1
Section 1-1
Features
1-1
Features
The F150 features supported by the Expert Menu mode are
described below.
Measurement Enhancement ® p 48, 49
By emphasizing the edge of the measurement object
and reducing noise, the F150 ensures effective object
measurement.
Shutter Speed ® p 47
The shutter speed can be selected to suit the
speed of movement of the measurement object.
Lighting Control ® p 41, 59
Camera with
Intelligent
Light Source
The illuminated area and the light level can be
controlled from the F150. (Only available when
Intelligent Camera with Light Source is connected.)
Sync Sensor
Position Displacement Compensation ® p 62
Position displacement compensation can be used to correct the
position of the measurement object using gray search, binary
center of gravity and area, binary center of gravity and axis
angle or gray edge position.
Changing Scenes ® p 131
Up to 16 different sets of measurement conditions can be set.
Each set of measurement conditions is called a “scene.” You
can switch scenes to automatically change the measurement
conditions, e.g. to those for a different measurement object.
Nine Measurement Methods ® p 4
Any of the following measurement methods can be used.
· Binary center of gravity and area
· Edge pitch
· Binary center of gravity and axis angle
· Surface defect
· Gray search
· Density averaging
· Precise search
· Gray edge position
· Relative search
2
Section 1-1
Features
Measurement Images ® p 160
Up to 23 measurement images are stored in memory for
easy confirmation of past images to see what problems
have occurred.
The images in memory are cleared when power is
turned OFF or the scene is changed. These images,
however, can be backed up to a computer.
F150
Monitor
Calibration ® p 50
The measurement value can be converted to
physical units (e.g., cm or mm) and output to an
external device.
Programmable
Controller
Terminal Block, RS-232C Port, CompoBus/D ® p
17, 121
The F150 can communicate with Programmable Controllers and other external devices via terminal blocks,
RS-232C port, or CompoBus/D. Calculations can be
performed on measurement results, or math functions
can be used to calculate the distance between two
regions or the maximum measurement results. The
external devices with which communications are supported, and the formats for communications vary with
the model.
Computer
Two-camera Unit ® p. 29
Two Cameras can be connected to the F150 via the Two-camera Unit.
Two-camera Unit
Camera 1
Camera 0
3
Section 1-2
Measurement Methods
1-2
Measurement Methods
1-2-1
Binary Center of Gravity and Area
This method is used to obtain the size and position of an object.
Density images with 256 gradations are read by the Camera.
These density images are separated into black pixels and white
pixels. The F150 uses the white pixels to measure the object.
Area
The area is the number of white pixels inside the measurement
region.
Measurement region
Number of white pixels = area
Note If the number of white pixels is the same as an acceptable product, the product will be accepted even if the shape is different. To
discriminate objects by shape, use either gray search or precise
search.
4
Section 1-2
Measurement Methods
Center of
Gravity
The center of gravity is calculated by regarding the white pixels
as a sheet of thick paper of uniform thickness. The center of gravity is the point at which the sheet of paper would balance when
placed on a sharp point. For example, the center of gravity for a
circular object would be the center of the circle. The center of
gravity of a rectangular object would be the intersection of lines
drawn from diagonally opposite corners.
Y
X
The coordinates for the center of gravity are obtained. These
coordinates can be used for position displacement compensation.
1-2-2
Binary Center of Gravity and Axis Angle
In addition to the binary center of gravity and area calculations
described previously, an axis angle can also be calculated. This
method is used to obtain the orientation of an object. More processing time, however, is required to calculate the axis angle.
Use the binary center of gravity and area measurement method
unless alignment of the axis angle is required.
5
Section 1-2
Measurement Methods
Axis Angle
The axis angle is the angle of the major axis of an ellipse that is
diagrammatically equivalent to the area occupied by the white
pixels.
Measurement region
The coordinates for the center of gravity and the axis angle are
obtained. This data can be used for position displacement compensation.
1-2-3
Gray Search and Precise Search
Use gray search and precise search to inspect the shape of an
object.
1 An image pattern for a satisfactory product is registered in
advance. This is referred to as the model.
Model registered
6
Section 1-2
Measurement Methods
2 The part of the input image that most corresponds to the
model is found. The extent of conformity with the model is
expressed as a correlation value. A correlation value
between 0 and 100 is displayed. The higher the correlation
value, the more similar the input image is to the model. By
setting a threshold for this correlation value, OK (acceptable) and NG (unacceptable) products can be distinguished.
Search
Correlation value: 95
Search
Correlation value: 52
The correlation value is low because
part of the image is missing.
In addition to the correlation value, the coordinates of the position of the model can be obtained and used for position displacement compensation.
The level of precision with which the position is obtained, differs
between gray searches and precise searches.
· Gray Search
With gray searches, the position is obtained in pixel units.
· Precise Search
With precise searches, the position is obtained in sub-pixel
units (units smaller than pixels). The processing time for this
search method is longer than for a gray search.
1-2-4
Gray Edge Position
Use gray edge position to locate the edge of an object.
Set the search direction and the change in color for each region.
· Direction: select one from ®, ¬, - or ¯.
· Color: select one from “Light ® Dark,” “Dark ® Light.”
7
Section 1-2
Measurement Methods
Example 1
To obtain the coordinate of this edge:
Measurement
region
Direction: ®
Color: Light ® Dark
This method can also be used for position displacement compensation.
Example 2
To calculate the position displacement
compensation required in the X direction.
To calculate the position displacement
compensation required in the Y direction.
1-2-5
Edge Pitch
Use edge pitch to find the number of objects. This method is useful when monitoring different models mixed together such as ICs
and connectors, and for distinguishing different types of model.
Width
Edge
Pitch (distance
between midpoints)
Number of objects
8
Measurement region
Section 1-2
Measurement Methods
1-2-6
Surface Defect
This method checks for surface defects by measuring variations
in density. The shape of the measurement region can be chosen
from arc, box, circumference, or line.
1 Small boxes are created in the measurement region. These
boxes are called “elements.” The density for each element
is calculated.
Element
Measurement
region
The size of the elements and the interval between
each one can be changed from the menu.
2 The difference in density between an element above and an
element to the left in the same row is calculated for each element. The larger of these intervals is the defect for the element.
Compared with element above.
Element
A
The larger of these two values
is the defect of element A.
Compared with element in same row.
3 The defect is calculated for all of the elements. If the largest
defect is larger than the evaluation criteria, the measurement region is judged to contain a defect. When deciding the
evaluation criteria, perform measurements of several samples and base the evaluation criteria on the defects for those
samples.
9
Section 1-2
Measurement Methods
Note Since inspection is performed by variations in density, if a design
or mark is contained inside the measurement region, this will be
detected as a defect. When inspecting an area containing a
design or mark, use a gray search or a precise search. The
image will be compared with the model, and the level of similarity
(the correlation) will be obtained.
1-2-7
Density Averaging
Use density averaging to perform measurement based on differences in the average brightness. The density averaging function
obtains the density for each pixel (between 0 and 255), obtains
the average, and performs measurement on this value.
Example: Existence of Measurement Object
Density averaging can be used to verify the existence of a measurement object.
Measurement object in
measurement region
Average density
within measurement
region: 30
1-2-8
No measurement object in
measurement region
Average density
within measurement
region: 200
Relative Search
Use this method to obtain the positions of markings, holes, and
other features, and to judge whether these features are within
the acceptable range. This method is based on relative position,
so models must be registered in two positions: a measurement
position and a reference position.
10
Section 1-2
Measurement Methods
Example: Checking the Position of a Label
The relative search function can be used to confirm the position
of a label by checking the relative positions of the label and one
corner of the measurement object.
Correct position
Incorrect position
Model 1
Model 0
11
Section 1-3
Menu Tree
1-3
Menu Tree
1-3-1
Without Two-camera Unit
Scene
® p 131
Scene 0 to Scene 15
Shutter speed ® p 47
Adjust
Filtering ® p 48
BGS levels ® p 49
Calibration ® p 50
Light control ® p 59
Position
compensation
Filtering ® p 64
BGS levels ® p 64
Adjust
Region
Region 0
Region 1
Direction ® p 77
Set
mode
(see
note)
Measurement
region
Region
Region 0
to
Region 15
Gravity and area ® p 66
Gravity and axis ® p 67
Edge position ® p 71
Gray search ® p 73
Gravity and area ® p 82
Gravity and axis ® p 83
Edge position ® p 91
Edge pitch ® p 95
Gray search ® p 98
Precise search ® p 98
Defect (...) ® p 105
Density AVG ® p 108
Relative search ® p 112
Expression
Judge ® p 121
Data ® p 122
Monitor mode ® p 136
Run mode ® p 149
System
Communications
Output ® p 155
Device settings ® p 156
Display ® p 158
Terminal block ® p 182
RS-232C ® p 198, 234, 322
Normal ® p 203
Host link ® p 239
CompoBus/D set ® p 271
CompoBus/D ref ® p 275
F150-C10E-3-DRT only
Set key Operation ® p 167
Switch menu
Not used.
Startup mode ® p 170
Error method ® p 172
Version ® p 173
Tool ® p 176
Save ® p 179
Note When the Two-camera Unit is used, the menu configuration for
Set mode will be different. Refer to the following pages for
details.
12
Section 1-3
Menu Tree
1-3-2
With Two-camera Unit
Two-camera Switching Mode
Camera 0
Set
mode
Adjust 0
Shutter speed 01 (see note) ® p 47
Filtering 0 ® p 48
BGS levels 0 ® p 49
Calibration 0 ® p 50
Light control 0 ® p 59
Position
compensation
0
Adjust
0
Region
Filtering ® p 64
BGS levels ® p 64
Region 0
Region 1
Direction ® p 77
Measurement
region 0
Region
Region 0
to
Region 7
Gravity and area ® p 66
Gravity and axis ® p 67
Edge position ® p 71
Gray search ® p 73
Gravity and area ® p 82
Gravity and axis ® p 83
Edge position ® p 91
Edge pitch ® p 95
Gray search ® p 98
Precise search ® p 98
Defect (...) ® p 105
Density AVG ® p 108
Relative search ® p 112
Note The shutter speed 01 setting under Adjust 0 applies to both
Camera 0 and Camera 1.
Camera 1
Set
mode
Adjust 1
Filtering 1 ® p 48
BGS levels 1 ® p 49
Calibration 1 ® p 50
Light control 1 ® p 59
Position
compensation
1
Adjust
1
Region
Filtering ® p 64
BGS levels ® p 64
Region 10
Region 11
Direction ® p 77
Measurement
region 1
Region
Region 8
to
Region 15
Gravity and area ® p 66
(Same as Position compensation 0)
Gray search ® p 73
Gravity and area ® p 82
(Same as Measurement region 0)
Relative search ® p 112
13
Section 1-3
Menu Tree
Both Cameras
Expression
Judge ® p 121
Data ® p 122
Vertical Composition Mode, Horizontal Composition Modes 1
and 2
Camera 0
Set
mode
Adjust 0
Shutter speed 01 (see note 1) ® p 47
Filtering 01 ® p 48
BGS levels 01 ® p 49
Calibration 0 ® p 50
Light control 0 ® p 59
Position
compensation
0
Adjust 01 (see note 2)
Region
Region 0
Region 1
Direction ® p 77
Measurement
region 0
Region
Region 0
to
Region 7
Filtering ® p 64
BGS levels ® p 64
Gravity and area ® p 66
Gravity and axis ® p 67
Edge position ® p 71
Gray search ® p 73
Gravity and area ® p 82
Gravity and axis ® p 83
Edge position ® p 91
Edge pitch ® p 95
Gray search ® p 98
Precise search ® p 98
Defect (...) ® p 105
Density AVG ® p 108
Relative search ® p 112
Camera 1
Set
mode
Adjust 1
Calibration 1 (see note 1) ® p 50
Light control 1 ® p 59
Position
compensation
1
Region
Region 10
Region 11
Direction ® p 77
Measurement
region 0
Region
Region 8
to
Region 15
Gravity and area ® p 66
(Same as Position compensation 0)
Gray search ® p 73
Gravity and area ® p 82
(Same as Measurement region 0)
Relative search ® p 112
Both Cameras
Expression
14
Judge ® p 121
Data ® p 122
Section 1-3
Menu Tree
Note The shutter speed 01, filtering 01, and BGS levels 01 settings
under adjust 0, and the adjust 01 setting under position compensation 0 are common to Camera 0 and Camera 1.
Camera 0 Mode, Camera 1 Mode
Adjust
Shutter speed ® p 47
Filtering ® p 48
BGS levels ® p 49
Calibration ® p 50
Light control ® p 59
Position
compensation
Adjust
Region
Filtering ® p 64
BGS levels ® p 64
Region 0
Region 1
Direction ® p 77
Set
mode
Measurement
region
Region
Region 0
to
Region 15
Gravity and area ® p 66
Gravity and axis ® p 67
Edge position ® p 71
Gray search ® p 73
Gravity and area ® p 82
Gravity and axis ® p 83
Edge position ® p 91
Edge pitch ® p 95
Gray search ® p 98
Precise search ® p 98
Defect (...) ® p 105
Density AVG ® p 108
Relative search ® p 112
Expression
Judge ® p 121
Data ® p 122
15
Section 1-4
Overview of F150 Installation and Operation
1-4
Overview of F150 Installation and
Operation
The following table shows the basic steps that must be performed to use the F150.
Step
Manual
1: Unit Connections and Wiring
Video
Monitor
Programmable Controller
Setup Manual
Power Supply
Console
Synchronous
sensor
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
computer
Camera with
Light Source
Expert Menu
Operation Manual
2: Setting Measurement Conditions
3: Confirming Operation, Measuring
Objects, and Outputting Results
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
computer
OK
Synchronous
sensor
NG
16
Programmable
Controller
OK
OK
NG
Section 1-5
Input and Output
1-5
Input and Output
The kind of communications supported varies according to the
model as shown below.
Item
F150-C10E-3, F150-C15E-3
External
communications
Connector for RS-232C
connections
F150-C10E-3-DRT
Connector for RS-232C
connections
Terminal
block
Terminal
block
Connector for CompoBus/D
connections
Input
Console
Yes
Yes
Normal
Yes
Yes
Host
link
Yes
No
Terminal block
Yes
Yes (except DI0 to DI7)
CompoBus/D
No
Yes
RS232C
Normal
Yes
Yes
Host
link
Yes
No
Terminal block
Yes
Yes (except DO0 to DO15)
CompoBus/D
No
Yes
RS232C
Output
17
SECTION 2
Basic Operations
This section describes the overall flow of F150 application and basic operations.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
Starting and Quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
2-1-1
2-1-2
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
20
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-3
2-2-4
2-2-5
2-2-6
Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triangle Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing a Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
23
25
26
26
28
Two-camera Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
2-3-1
2-3-2
Two-camera Unit Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camera Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
34
Intelligent Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
19
Section 2-1
Starting and Quitting
2-1
Starting and Quitting
2-1-1
Starting
Note Before connecting components or wiring power supply lines and
grounding wires, be sure to refer to the relevant section in the
Setup Manual.
Use the following procedure to start up the F150.
1 Be sure that the basic F150 components have been connected correctly. ® Setup Manual p. 7
2 Turn ON the power supply on the monitor.
3 Turn ON the power supply on the F150.
A startup message will appear followed by a processing
message. After a short pause, the initial screen will appear.
The following screen will appear the first time power is
turned ON.
Note The startup scene and startup mode that appear when power is
turned ON can be set. Use these settings to make daily operation
more efficient once the F150 is ready for actual operation.
® p 170
2-1-2
Quitting
Save all settings to flash memory before turning OFF the power.
The data in flash memory is loaded each time the F150 is started.
Any changes made will be lost unless they are saved to the flash
memory.
The measurement images and sample images in memory are
also cleared when the power is turned OFF. These images can-
20
Section 2-1
Starting and Quitting
not be saved to flash memory, but they can be backed up on a
computer if required. ® p 179
! Caution Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal while a mes-
sage is being displayed in any save or load operation. Data in
memory will be destroyed, and the F150 may not operate correctly the next time it is started.
1 Display the Basic Screen.
2 Move the cursor to MON and press the ENT Key.
3 Select SAVE.
4 A confirmation message will be displayed. Select Execute
to save any changes.
21
Section 2-2
Menu Operations
When saving is completed, the screen from step 1 will be
returned.
5 Turn OFF the power to the F150.
2-2
Menu Operations
2-2-1
Input Devices
The menu operations are performed from either the Console or
the RS-232C.
Console
The Console is used to perform menu operations. Be sure to
familiarize yourself with Console operations before actually
using the menus.
TRIG (trigger) Key
ESC (escape) Key
Up, Down, Left,
and Right Keys
SHIFT Key
22
ENT (enter) Key
Section 2-2
Menu Operations
Key
Function
ESC: Escape Key
The function of this key varies with the screen displayed. The
function is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
When moving between menus, pressing this key interrupts
processing and returns the user to the previous menu display.
TRIG: Trigger Key
Starts object measurement.
ENT: Enter Key
Executes a function or sets a value.
Up and Down Keys
Used to move the cursor up and down to select items.
Also used to set values. The Up Key will increase a value by 1
and the Down Key will decrease a value by 1. Continue pressing
the Up or Down Key to quickly increase or decrease a value.
Left and Right Keys
Used to move the cursor left or right to select items.
SHIFT Key
Must be pressed in combination with another key to have any
effect. Specific functions are assigned to SHIFT + another key for
specific screens.
RS-232C
Operations equivalent to using the Console keys can be performed from a computer via RS-232C. ® p 321
2-2-2
Screen Displays
The F150 is operated by selecting functions displayed on the
screen. Familiarize yourself with each function before operating
the F150.
Scene number
Mode
Scn 0=SET=
Adjust
Position compensation
Measurement region
Expression
t
Through
Key operations
Functions
Cursor
Displayed image
23
Section 2-2
Menu Operations
Scene
Number
The current scene number is given. There are 16 scenes that can
be created.
Mode
The current operating mode is displayed.
Display
Displayed
Image
Meaning
SET
Sets the measurement conditions.
MON
(Monitor)
Checks whether measurement is being performed
correctly under the set measurement conditions.
The measurement results are displayed on the
monitor only. The results cannot be output to
external devices.
RUN
Performs measurement. The measurement results
are output to an external device via a terminal
block or RS-232C.
SYS (System)
Sets system conditions for the F150.
TOOL
Saves settings and images to a computer as
backup.
SAVE
Saves data to flash memory. If new settings have
been made, be sure to save the data before
quitting.
The type of image being displayed is shown. ® p 164
Display
Meaning
Through
The image taken by the Camera is displayed
directly.
Freeze
A still of the image taken by the Camera is
displayed.
...memoryjj
A previously measured image stored in memory is
displayed. With the F150, a maximum of 24 (0 to
23) measurement images can be stored in
memory.
Key
Operations
Displays special key combinations at the bottom of the screen
where available.
Functions
The available functions are displayed on the menus.
Cursor
The cursor is moved to the desired function by pressing the Cursor Keys.
24
Section 2-2
Menu Operations
2-2-3
Menu Tree
F150 menus are hierarchical. The cursor is moved to the
required functions to set measurement conditions. Use the following procedure to move around the menu tree.
1 Move the cursor to the desired function, using the Up,
Down, Left, and Right Cursor Keys.
2 Press the ENT Key.
In this example, the cursor will move to the Adjust menu.
Repeat this step to move to lower levels.
3 Press the ESC Key.
The display will move to the previous menu level (here, the
screen shown in step 1).
25
Section 2-2
Menu Operations
2-2-4
Inputting Values
This section explains how to input numerical values when setting
measurement conditions.
This procedure is mainly used for setting judgement conditions
and system conditions.
1 Move the cursor to the item for which a value is to be
changed and press the ENT Key.
The cursor size will change to a cursor the size of a single
digit.
2 Using the Left and Right Keys, move the cursor to the digit
to be changed.
[ 2000.000: 0002300.000]
3 Use the Up and Down Keys to change the value.
(Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change other digits as required.)
[ 2000.000: 0002500.000]
4 Press the ENT Key when all digits have been changed as
desired.
The value will be set.
[ 2000.000:
2-2-5
2500.000]
Triangle Mark
Items with an inverted triangle after them have a list of alternatives. Select one of these items when making settings. The
selection method is given here.
26
Section 2-2
Menu Operations
1 Move the cursor to the item to be set.
Camera unit
Out of use B
Intelligent lighting 0
Out of use B
Intelligent lighting 1
Out of use B
:
:
:
End
2 Press the ENT Key.
The selections will be displayed.
Camera unit
Out of use B
Intelligent
lighting 0
Out of use
Out
of use B
F150-A20
Intelligent lighting 1
Out of use B
:
:
:
End
3 Move the cursor to the desired selection using the Up and
Down Keys.
Camera unit
Out of use B
Intelligent
lighting 0
Out of use
Out
of use B
F150-A20
Intelligent lighting 1
Out of use B
:
:
:
End
27
Section 2-2
Menu Operations
4 Press the ENT Key to enter the setting.
Camera unit
F150-A20 B
Intelligent lighting 0
Out of use B
Intelligent lighting 1
Out of use B
:
:
:
End
2-2-6
Drawing a Region
Use the following method to draw model regions and measurement regions. Create the required shape by moving the cursor
with the Up, Down, Left and Right Keys and pressing the ENT
Key at the desired positions. Use together with the SHIFT Key to
move the cursor quickly.
Types of Figure
Drawing method
Type of figure
Box
Specify 2 opposite corners.
Ellipse
Specify 2 opposite corners for the circumscribed rectangle
of the ellipse.
Circle
Specify the center and the radius.
Circumference
Specify the center, radius, and thickness.
Polygon
Specify up to 10 neighboring vertices. At the last point,
press the ENT Key twice and the last point will be joined to
the first point and the figure will be drawn.
The type and number of regions that can be drawn, depend on
the measurement method.
Drawing Mode
Drawing
mode
Function
OR
Use this mode to draw a shape as a model or
measurement region.
NOT
Use to delete part of a region.
As an example, the following diagram shows how to draw a measurement region with the central part removed. Draw figure 1 in
28
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
OR mode and then draw figure 2 in NOT mode. Measurement
will only be performed for the outer band.
Figure 1 (draw with OR)
Figure 2 (draw with NOT)
2-3
Two-camera Unit
Using the Two-camera Unit, two Cameras can be connected to
the F150 enabling images to be obtained simultaneously.
29
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Synchronized Images from Different Directions
Checking Boxes from Both Ends
Measurement can be performed for boxes from both ends simultaneously using two Cameras.
Two-camera Unit
Camera 0
Camera 1
Synchronous
Sensor
OK product
NG product
F150
NG product
Mutual Light-interference Prevention Function
If
the
Camera
with
Intelligent
Light
Source
(F150-SLC20/SLC50) or the Camera with Light Source
(F150-SL20A/SL50A) is used, there is a slight difference in the
time at which the light sources for the respective Cameras come
ON (first Camera 0 then Camera 1). Therefore, there is no
mutual light interference.
30
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Measuring Large Objects with One Controller
Positioning
PWB
Using two Cameras, the field of vision can be split in two and the
coordinates of positioning markings can be obtained.
Two-camera Unit
Camera
1
Camera
0
F150
Positioning data output
Programmable Controller
31
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Measurement processing can be performed on images obtained
by joining Camera 0 images and Camera 1 images. This means
that the image required can be obtained in the time it usually
takes to obtain one normal image. (In Horizontal Composition
mode 1, however, an extra 8.3 ms is required.)
Camera 0 image
Camera 1 image
Half of each image
joined together
Calibration data can be set
separately for each Camera.
2-3-1
Two-camera Unit Menus
The default menu configuration for the F150 is for one-camera
operation. For two-camera operation it is necessary to change to
the two-camera menu configuration. This is done by changing
the Camera unit setting in SYS/Device settings.
32
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen, move the cursor to MON, and
press the ENT Key.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
2 Select SYS.
Scn 0 B MON B
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
----
--- ms
Freeze
33
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
3 Select Device settings.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
4 Move the cursor to Camera unit and press the ENT Key.
The selections will be displayed.
Camera unit
Out of use B
Intelligent lighting 0
Out of use B
Intelligent lighting 1
Out of use B
:
:
:
End
Camera unit
Out of use B
Intelligent
lighting 0
Out of use
Out of use B
F150-A20
Intelligent lighting 1
Out of use B
:
:
:
End
Select F150-A20 using the Up and Down Keys, and press the
ENT Key to enter the setting.
5 Select End.
The screen for step 3 will be returned. Press the ESC Key to
return the Basic Screen shown in step 1.
2-3-2
Camera Modes
When entering Set mode for the first time after the making the
settings in SYS/Device settings, the screen for selecting the
camera mode will be displayed. The menu configuration varies
with the camera mode selected as shown below.
Refer to the following page for details on camera modes: ® p.
38
Refer to the following page for details on changing camera
modes after settings have been made: ® p. 40
34
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to MON and press the ENT key.
Scn 0 B MON B
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
----
--- ms
Cam 0 Freeze
- ¯: Camera
2 Select SET.
The screen for selecting the camera mode will be displayed.
2-Camera
35
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
If the screen display goes directly into Set mode without the
screen for selecting the camera mode being displayed, display
this screen by pressing the SHIFT + ENT Keys together.
Scn 0 = SET =
Adjust
Position compensation
Measurement region
Expression
S+ENT: Camera mode
Through
3 Select the camera mode.
The screen for Set mode will be displayed with the menu
configuration for the camera mode selected.
Menu Configuration for Two-camera Operation
If a two-camera operation mode (Two-camera Switching mode,
Vertical Composition mode, or Horizontal Composition mode 1
or 2) is selected, the following screen will be displayed.
Scn 0 = SET =
Adjust 0
Position compensation 0
Measurement region 0
Adjust 1
Position compensation 1
Measurement region 1
Expression
S+ENT: Camera mode
36
For Camera 0
For Camera 1
For both Cameras
Cam 0
Through
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Camera 0 Mode, Camera 1 Mode
If Camera 0 mode or Camera 1 mode is selected, the following
screen will be displayed.
Scn 0 = SET =
Adjust
Position compensation
Measurement region
Expression
S+ENT: Camera mode
Through
The procedures for these modes are the same as when only one
Camera is connected to the F150.
In subsequent explanations, notes (under “Two-camera Operation”) have been added in places where there are differences in
procedures for one-camera operation (i.e., when only one Camera is connected, or when the camera mode is Camera 0 mode
or Camera 1 mode) and procedures for two-camera operation
(i.e., the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, Vertical
Composition mode, or Horizontal Composition mode 1 or 2).
37
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Camera Modes
Camera
mode
Two-camera
Switching
Vertical
Composition
Screen image
Camera 0
Camera 1
Camera 0
Camera 1
Horizontal
Composition
1
Camera 0
Camera 1
38
Operation
With one trigger
execution, images are
obtained simultaneously
by both Cameras and
measurement is
performed on these
images in order (Camera
0 ® Camera 1).
Computations combining
data from both Cameras
are possible. (There are
8 measurement regions
for each Camera.)
With one trigger
execution, half of
Camera 0’s image and
half of Camera 1’s
image are combined and
measurement is
performed on this image.
Even though two
Cameras are used, the
time taken to obtain the
joined image is the same
as for one Camera and
so processing time is
reduced.
The central parts of
horizontally partitioned
images are joined. In
this mode, the image
input time is 8.3 ms
longer than the time
required for one Camera
to take an image. Only
the central parts of
images are used,
however, allowing simple
Camera installation.
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Camera
mode
Screen image
Horizontal
Composition
2
Camera 0
Camera 1
Operation
The top half of one
Camera’s image is
joined with the bottom
half of the other
Camera’s image. The
image input time is the
same as for one
Camera. Although the
processing time is less
than that for Horizontal
Composition mode 1,
since the top and bottom
halves of images are
joined, adjustment of the
Camera position is
required.
Camera 0
With one trigger
execution, an image is
obtained with Camera 0
and measurement is
performed on that
image. Even if another
Camera (Camera 1) is
connected, its image will
not be input. (See note.)
Camera 1
As with Camera 0 mode,
with one trigger
execution, an image is
obtained with Camera 0
and measurement is
performed on that
image. (See note.)
Note The camera mode can be specified as part of scene data. For
example, Camera 0 mode can be specified as the camera mode
for scene 0 and Camera 1 mode can be specified as the camera
mode for scene 1. When either of the one camera modes are
used, up to 16 measurement regions can be specified.
39
Section 2-3
Two-camera Unit
Changing
Camera
Mode
Press the SHIFT + ENT Keys in Set mode to display the screen
for changing the camera mode.
Scn 0 = SET =
Adjust 0
Position compensation 0
Measurement region 0
Adjust 1
Position compensation 1
Measurement region 1
Expression
S+ENT: Camera mode
Cam 0
Through
Changing from Two-camera Operation to One-camera
Operation
When changing from Two-camera Switching mode, Vertical
Composition mode, or Horizontal Composition mode 1 or 2 to
Camera 0 mode or Camera 1 mode, information for the Camera
that is selected will be held, and information for the other Camera
will be cleared.
Example
Two-camera Switching mode
Cleared
Adjust 0
Position compensation 0
Measurement region 0
Adjust 1
Position compensation 1
Measurement region 1
Expression
Vertical Composition mode
or Horizontal Composition
modes 1 or 2
Cleared
40
Adjust 0
Position compensation 0
Measurement region 0
Adjust 1
Position compensation 1
Measurement region 1
Expression
Camera 0 mode
Adjust
Position compensation
Measurement region
Expression
Camera 0 mode
Adjust
Position compensation
Measurement region
Expression
Section 2-4
Intelligent Light Source
Changing from One-camera Operation to Two-camera
Operation
When changing from Camera 0 mode or Camera 1 mode to Twocamera Switching mode, Vertical Composition mode, or Horizontal Composition mode 1 or 2, information for the original
Camera mode is held.
Camera 0 mode
Two-camera Switching mode
Adjust
Position compensation
Measurement region
Expression
Adjust 0
Position compensation 0
Measurement region 0
Adjust 1
Position compensation 1
Measurement region 1
Expression
Default
setting
Note After setting the measurement conditions for operation with just
one Camera connected, if a Two-camera Unit is connected and
the settings in SYS/Device settings are changed accordingly,
Camera 0 mode will be selected automatically, and the same
measurement conditions will be used.
2-4
Intelligent Light Source
In order to adjust the light level when using an Intelligent Light
Source, it is necessary to specify the Intelligent Light Source
model connected. This setting is performed in SYS/Device settings.
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen, move the cursor to MON, and
press the ENT key.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
41
Section 2-4
Intelligent Light Source
2 Select SYS.
Scn 0 B MON B
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
----
--- ms
Freeze
3 Select Device settings.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
4 Move the cursor to Intelligent lighting 0 (or 1) and press
the ENT Key.
The model selections will be displayed.
Camera unit
Out of use B
Intelligent lighting 0
Out of use B
Intelligent lighting 1
Out of use B
End
:
:
:
Camera unit
Out of use B
Intelligent lighting 0
Out of use B
Intelligent
lighting 1
Out of use
F150-LTC20
Out of use B
F150-LTC50
:
:
:
End
Select the model of the Intelligent Light Source connected using
the Up and Down Keys, and press the ENT key to enter the set-
42
Section 2-4
Intelligent Light Source
ting. The model number of the Intelligent Light Source itself is
selected. Therefore, when a Camera with Intelligent Light
Source is connected, make the settings shown below.
· If the F150-SLC20 is used, select F150-LTC20.
· If the F150-SLC50 is used, select F150-LTC50.
5 Select End.
The screen from step 3 will be returned. Press the ESC Key
to return the Basic Screen shown in step 1.
Note There are DIP switches on the Intelligent Light Sources for setting the unit number. Set the unit number for the Intelligent Light
Source connected to Camera 0 to 0 and set the unit number for
the Intelligent Light Source connected to Camera 1 to 1. The DIP
switch setting for the Intelligent Light Source for Camera 1 is
shown below.
O
N
O
N
F150-LTC20
Connected to
Connected to
Camera 0
Camera 1
Push up pin 1 on
the DIP switch.
F150-LTC50
Connected to
Connected to
Camera 0
Camera 1
O
F
F
O
F
F
Shift pin 1
to the right.
43
SECTION 3
Setting Measurement Conditions
This section describes the settings required for F150 operation.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
Entering Set Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
47
3-2-1
Shutter Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
3-2-2
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
3-2-3
Background Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
3-2-4
Output Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
3-2-5
Adjusting Light Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
Position Displacement Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
3-3-1
Adjusting the Image for Easier Position Displacement
Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
3-3-2
Setting Position Displacement Compensation
Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
3-3-3
Selecting the Direction for Position Displacement
Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
3-3-4
Changing Settings or Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation
Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
3-4-1
Selecting Region Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
3-4-2
Binary Center of Gravity and Area and Axis Angle
82
3-4-3
Gray Edge Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
3-4-4
Edge Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
3-4-5
Gray Search and Precise Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
3-4-6
Surface Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
3-4-7
Density Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
3-4-8
Relative Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
3-4-9
Changing Settings or Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
Output Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
132
3-6-1
Changing Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
3-6-2
Copying Scene Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing Measurement Conditions (Clearing Scenes)
134
135
45
Section 3-1
Entering Set Mode
3-1
Entering Set Mode
To set the measurement conditions, it is first necessary to enter
Set mode.
Note When a Two-camera Unit or an Intelligent Light Source are connected, make the required settings in SYS/Device settings
before entering Set mode. ® p. 32, 41
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen, move the cursor to MON, and
press the ENT key.
2 Select SET.
Scn 0 B MON B
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
----
--- ms
Freeze
The Basic Screen for Set mode will be displayed.
Scn 0 = SET =
Adjust
Position compensation
Measurement region
Expression
Through
Two-camera
Operation
46
If the Two-camera Unit is connected, select the camera mode
when entering Set mode. ® p. 34
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
3-2
Adjusting Images
Two-camera
Operation
3-2-1
If two Cameras are used, Adjust 0 for Camera 0 and Adjust 1 for
Camera 1 will be displayed. ® p. 36
Shutter Speed
Change the shutter speed when the object is moving quickly,
causing the image to be blurred.
Object movement
Shutter speed
Slow
1/100 s
1/500 s
1/2000 (*) s
1/10000 s
Fast
* Default setting
Two-camera
Operation
If two Cameras are used, the setting for shutter speed in Adjust
0/Shutter speed 01 will be used for both Cameras.
Procedure
1 Go to Adjust/Shutter speed.
Shutter speed
Filtering
BGS levels
Calibration
Light control
1
2 Select the shutter speed while monitoring the image.
3 Press the ENT Key to enter the setting.
47
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
3-2-2
Filtering
The image read by the Camera can be manipulated to create an
image that is easier to measure, by using smoothing or edge
enhancement.
Smoothing displays a smoothed image with reduced noise.
Smoothing allows suppression of the effects of uneven lighting
due to an uneven or damaged surface.
Edge enhancement displays an image with enhanced edges
between bright and dark regions to compensate for blurred
images.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering.
Filtering method
Function
OFF
No filtering.
Smoothing
Displays a smooth image with reduced noise.
Select either weak or strong smoothing.
Enhance edges
Displays an image with enhanced edges
between bright and dark regions.
Extract edges
Displays an image with the edges between the
bright and dark regions extracted.
Note The filtering set here is used for object measurement. Filtering
can be set separately for position displacement compensation. ® p. 64
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Vertical Composition mode or Horizontal
Composition mode 1 or 2, the filtering setting in Adjust 0/Filtering 01 will be used for both Cameras.
Procedure
1 Go to Adjust/Filtering.
Shutter speed
Filtering
BGS levels
Calibration
Light control
48
1
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
2 Select the filtering method while monitoring the image.
3 Press the ENT Key to enter the setting.
3-2-3
Background Suppression
Background suppression (BGS) excludes the background of the
measurement object from the measurement process.
BGS changes image areas with densities below the lower limit to
0, and image areas with densities above the upper limit to 255.
Image areas with densities between the lower and upper limits
are graded from 0 to 255 so that only images with densities
between the lower and upper limits are measured.
Look at the image and set the upper and lower limits of the density to eliminate the background.
Example
Lower limit: 150
Upper limit: 255
Measurement object
Density
255
255
150
Background
0
0
Background density (cut)
Image areas with densities of 149 or lower
will not be measured and the density will
be changed to 0.
Only image areas with densities between
150 and 255 will be measured. The whole
image is graded from 0 to 255.
Note The BGS levels set here are used for object measurement. BGS
levels can be set separately for position displacement compensation. ® p. 64
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Vertical Composition mode or Horizontal
Composition modes 1 or 2, the BGS levels set in Adjust 0 /BGS
Levels 01 will be used for both Cameras.
49
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
Procedure
1 Go to Adjust/BGS levels.
Shutter speed
Filtering
BGS levels
Calibration
Light control
1
2 Move the cursor to the upper-limit value and use the Left
and Right Keys to decrease or increase the value.
Press the Right Key to increase the smallest digit by 1 (use
with SHIFT Key to increase by 10). Press the Left Key to
decrease the smallest digit by 1 (use with SHIFT Key to
decrease by 10).
3 Repeat the previous step to change the lower limit.
4 Select OK to exit this screen.
2
3
4
3-2-4
Output Calibration
Calibration can be set to output the measurement results in
physical units, such as mm.
Set the relationship between the physical coordinates and the
camera coordinates to convert the measurement results from
pixels to physical units, such as mm, mm, or cm.
If calibration data is not set, the default settings will remain, and
measurements using the camera coordinates will be output.
Default Settings
· Coordinate system: Left-handed system
· Origin: Upper left corner of screen
50
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
· Magnification: 1.000
· Unit: mm/pix
Origin
F150 screen
(Camera coordinates)
484 mm
(= 484 pixels)
512 mm
(= 512 pixels)
There are 2 settings for calibration: “Sampling” and “Parameter
input.”
Two-camera
Operation
Calibration can be set separately for each Camera. The setting
for Camera 0 is in Adjust 0/Calibration 0 and the setting for
Camera 1 is in Adjust 1/Calibration 1.
Sampling
Register a model, and perform a sample measurement. Enter
the physical coordinates of the position of the model. The calibration will be calculated automatically. Sample measurements can
be made in up to 3 places.
· When the magnifications are the same for the X and the Y
directions, make sample measurements in 2 places only.
51
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
· When the magnifications in the X and Y directions are different,
perform sampling measurement in 3 places.
Procedure
1 Go to Adjust/Calibration.
Shutter speed
Filtering
BGS levels
Calibration
Light control
1
2 Select Model registration.
2
52
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
3 Register the model image to be used for sampling.
Model registration
140,160
4 Select Sampling.
Model registration
Sampling
Parameter input
Reference parameters
4
5 Draw the sampling region.
Press the SHIFT + ENT Keys to display the screen for
changing the size and position of the region.
Change sampling region
1 time (s)
391,363
TRG: Sampling SFT+ENT: Region
53
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
6 Press the TRIG Key to execute sampling.
A cross and a frame will appear at the position where the
model is found, and the screen for inputting the physical
coordinates will be displayed.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values:
® p. 26
Note If Image Not Found
If the brightness varies with the position, the correlation with the
model will be low. In this case, it may not be possible to find the
image for sampling. Adjust the lighting so that the image is illuminated evenly. Take particular care when the direction of illumination has been changed using an Intelligent Light Source.
7 Enter the physical coordinates of the center of the model
(the position of the cross) and select End.
The screen from step 5 will be returned.
If a mistake is made, press the SHIFT + ESC Keys and
repeat the previous sampling operation.
By repeating steps 5 to 7, make samples for the required
number of places.
· When making samples in 2 places, press the ESC Key
after the second sampling. A registration confirmation
message will be displayed.
· When making samples in 3 places, a registration confirmation message will be displayed after the third sampling.
54
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
8 Select Execute.
Parameter Input
Use the following procedure to directly input parameters to be
used for calibration.
· Origin
Specify the physical coordinates for the position of the origin as
desired.
Upper-left corner of screen
Center of screen
Lower-left corner of screen
55
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
· Coordinate System
Select the coordinate system for the physical coordinates.
Left-handed System
Origin upper left
Positive
direction
Positive
direction
Origin
center
Origin lower left
Positive
direction
Right-handed System
Origin upper left
Positive
direction
Positive
direction
Positive
direction
Origin
center
Origin lower left
· Magnification and Units
Set the physical unit that will correspond to one pixel. Set a
value in the range 0.010 to 9.999 for the magnification. Choose
a unit from mm, mm, or cm.
F150 screen
Camera
200 pixels
20 mm
The magnification is 20(mm)¸200(pixels)=0.1(mm/pix).
In other words, 1 pixel in camera coordinates will correspond to 0.1 mm in physical units. In the menu, pixel is
represented by “pix.”
56
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
Procedure
1 Go to Adjust/Calibration.
Shutter speed
Filtering
BGS levels
Calibration
Light control
1
2 Select Parameter input.
Model registration
Sampling
Parameter input
Reference parameters
2
3 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values:
® p. 26
4 Select End to enter the settings.
57
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
Reference Parameters
This screen is used to check data settings.
The symbol, s, represents the error standard deviation. It is the standard deviation value of the
difference between the physical coordinates input for calibration settings and the coordinates
after conversion based on the calculated conversion values A to F. It is calculated according to
the following formula:
=
[
N
i=1
((RXi–X i) 2 + (RYi–Y i) 2) N]
(RXi,RYi): Physical coordinates input for calibration settings (i=1 to N).
(X’i,Y’i): Physical coordinates after conversion according to the conversion values (i=1 to N).
N: Data number (sampling places 1 to 3)
A to F represent the calibration
conversion values. The camera
coordinates are converted to physical units based on these calibration
conversion values. The formulae
for conversion to physical units are
as follows:
X’ = A ´ X + B ´ Y + C
Y’ = D ´ X + E ´ Y + F
(X,Y): measurement position
(camera coordinates),
unit: pixels
Indicates physical width (in X direction) of screen.
(X’,Y’): conversion position
(physical coordinates),
units: mm
“em” indicates the maximum error.
It is the largest value of the differences between the physical coordinates input for
calibration settings and the coordinates after conversion based on the calculated
conversion values A to F. It is calculated according to the following formula:
em = MAX ((RXi–X i) 2 + (RYi–Y i) 2)
MAX: Outputs the largest value of the expression for values (i = 1 to N).
(RXi,RYi): Physical coordinates input for calibration settings (i = 1 to N).
(X’i,Y’i): Physical coordinates obtained after conversion based on the conversion values (i = 1 to N).
N: Data number (sampling places 1 to 3)
Procedure
1 Go to Adjust/Calibration.
Shutter speed
Filtering
BGS levels
Calibration
Light control
1
2 Select Reference parameters.
The parameters will be displayed.
3 Select OK to exit this screen.
58
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
3-2-5
Adjusting Light Level
The light level of Intelligent Light Sources can be adjusted from
the F150. Before using an Intelligent Light Source, be sure to
change the settings in SYS/Device settings. ® p. 41
The light level for Intelligent Light Sources can be set separately
for Camera 0 and Camera 1. Make the settings for Camera 0 and
Camera 1 in Adjust 0/Light control 0 and Adjust 1/Light control 1 respectively.
Two-camera
Operation
Sample Lighting Pattern
There are 15 lighting patterns registered with the F150. The lighting can be set simply by going through the different patterns in
order and selecting the one that gives the clearest image.
F150-LTC20
Pattern
number
Contents
F150-LTC50
Light level
Contents
Light level
1
Center
50000
All
77777777
2
Rim (weak)
03333
Inside (weak)
44440000
3
Rim (strong)
07777
Inside (strong)
77770000
4
Top and bottom only
07070
Outside (weak)
00004444
5
Top and bottom
emphasized
27272
Outside (strong)
00007777
6
Left and right only
00707
Top and bottom
70707070
7
Left and right
emphasized
22727
Left and right
07070707
8
Top
07000
Inside top
70000000
9
Right
00700
Inside right
07000000
10
Bottom
00070
Inside bottom
00700000
11
Left
00007
Inside left
00070000
12
Center strong, rim
very weak
51111
Outside top
00007000
13
Center strong, rim
weak
52222
Outside right
00000700
14
Center very weak, rim
strong
17777
Outside bottom
00000070
15
Center weak, rim
strong
27777
Outside left
00000007
Adjusting Light Level Separately
The light level for each section can be set separately to a value
between 0 and 7. The setting “0” represents the unlit state, and
the higher the setting value the higher the light level. Light levels
can also be set by adjusting the light levels for the sections separately after selecting a sample lighting pattern.
59
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
F150-LTC20 (Field of Vision: 20 mm)
The light level can be adjusted in 5 sections. The light level is
indicated on the screen by a 5-digit number. Each digit represents the light level of one of the 5 sections.
As seen from the Camera
Section E
Section D
Section A
Section B
Section C
F150-LTC50 (Field of Vision: 50 mm)
The light level can be adjusted in 8 sections. The light level is
indicated on the screen by an 8-digit number. Each digit represents the light level of one of the 8 sections.
Section A
Section H
Section B
Section C
Section G
Section D
Section E
Section F
Procedure
1 Select Adjust/Light control.
Shutter speed
Filtering
BGS levels
Calibration
Light control
60
1
Section 3-2
Adjusting Images
2 Switch sample patterns using the SHIFT + Left/Right Keys.
Pattern number
Light control (F150-LTC20)
Lighting pattern 1: 50000
Light level indicated
graphically
SFT+
: Sample
Through
: Segment
: Light volume
3 For fine adjustment of light levels, move to the desired digit
using the Right and Left Keys.
Light control (F150-LTC20)
Lighting pattern 1: 50000
SFT+
The background for
the digit corresponding
to the section being
adjusted is reversed.
: Sample
Through
: Segment
: Light volume
61
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
4 Change the light level using the Up and Down Keys.
Light control (F150-LTC20)
Lighting pattern : 50050
SFT+
Light level for
section D
changed to 5.
: Sample
Through
: Segment
: Light volume
5 Press the ENT Key to enter the setting.
3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
The following functions are available for position displacement
compensation:
· Adjust: Adjusts images to make position displacement compensation easier.
· Region: Sets the regions and methods used for position displacement compensation:
Gravity and area.
Gravity and axis angle
Gray edge position
Gray search
Change/clear settings
· Direction: Sets the direction for position displacement compensation.
The position displacement compensation function is used when
the position and orientation of measurement objects are not consistent. By using this function, the displacement between the reference position and the current position is obtained, and this displacement is compensated for in measurements.
62
Position Displacement Compensation
Section 3-3
Reference Position
The measurement region and measurement object
are in the correct positions.
Measurement region
Measurement object
Measurement Object Displaced
Without compensation, measurement is performed with
“A” outside the measurement
region.
63
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
By making position displacement compensation settings...
Freeze display
Measurement is performed
after the image is returned to
the reference position.
Through display
Measurement is performed after the
measurement region is moved to
compensate for the displacement.
In either case, measurement is performed
with “A” in the measurement region.
Two-camera
Operation
3-3-1
If two Cameras are used, Position compensation 0 for Camera
0 and Position compensation 1 for Camera 1 are displayed.
Adjusting the Image for Easier Position
Displacement Compensation
Filtering
A different kind of filtering is used for position displacement compensation to that used for ordinary measurement.
· For measurement: Smoothing is used to reduce noise.
· For position displacement compensation: Edges are
enhanced to make the shape of the measurement object
clearer.
The operating procedure, however, is the same as for ordinary
measurement. ® p. 48
Background Suppression
A different level of background suppression is used for position
displacement compensation to that used for ordinary measurement. The operating procedure, however, is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 49
Two-camera
Operation
64
If the camera mode is Vertical Composition mode or Horizontal
Composition mode 1 or 2, the settings for filtering and back-
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
ground suppression in Position compensation 0/Adjust 01 will
be used or both Cameras.
Two-camera
Operation
3-3-2
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, there is an
Adjust menu in both Position compensation 0 and Position
compensation 1 and so separate filtering and background suppression settings can be made for each Camera.
Setting Position Displacement Compensation
Regions
1 Select Position compensation.
1
Adjust
Position
compensation
Adjust
Measurement
Region region
Expression
Direction
2
2 Select Region.
The screen for selecting the region number will be displayed.
Press the SHIFT + ESC Keys to reverse (dark « clear) the background.
Press the SHIFT Key together with the Up/
Down Key to switch display images. ® p.
164
Two-camera Operation
If two Cameras are used, regions 0 and 1 will
be displayed for Position compensation 0
and regions 10 and 11 will be displayed for
Position compensation 1.
65
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
3 Select the region number.
The selections for the position displacement compensation
method will be displayed.
Scn 0 = SET = Region (position)
Gravity and area
Gravity and axis
Edge position
Gray search
Freeze
4 From this point, the procedures for the various measure-
ment methods are given separately. Refer to the appropriate explanation.
Note Be sure to set the compensation direction after drawing the position displacement compensation region. Position displacement
compensation will not be executed just by drawing the region.
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity
and Axis Angle
Images taken by the Camera are made up of 256 gradations.
Binary processing is the process whereby these images are
divided into black pixels (0) and white pixels (1). The F150 performs measurements on the areas occupied by white pixels.
66
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
Binary Center of Gravity and Area
The center of gravity of the areas occupied by the white pixels is
calculated and the displacement between this and the reference
center of gravity is calculated.
Reference center of gravity
X displacement
Y displacement
Center of gravity of input image
Binary Center of Gravity and Axis Angle
The center of gravity and the axis angle of the area occupied by
the white pixels is obtained, and the displacements between
these values and those for the model are calculated.
Reference center of gravity
Angle displacement q.
X displacement
Y displacement
Center of gravity of input image
Operational Flow
In Position compensation/Region, select Gravity and area or
Gravity and axis.
1 Set the binary level.
2 Draw the region.
3 Set the evaluation criteria.
67
Position Displacement Compensation
1
Section 3-3
Setting the Binary Level
Set the level for conversion of 256-gradation images into binary
images. The F150 performs measurement for the white areas.
Therefore, make the settings so that the areas for which the center of gravity or the axis angle are desired are white.
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 83
Correct
Incorrect
Make the measurement
object white.
2
Drawing the Region
The center of gravity, or the center of gravity and the axis angle
for the white area contained inside the measurement region are
obtained. Make a region of a size and position that allows for
movement of the range of the measurement object. When drawing of the region has been completed, the center of gravity and
the axis angle (when set to find binary center of gravity and axis
angle) will be measured. This position will be taken as the reference. Therefore, draw the region after putting the measurement
object in a position where the part to be measured lies totally
inside the screen.
68
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 85
Figure number
Coordinates of arrow cursor
Up to 3 figures can be combined
to produce 1 region.
3
Setting the Evaluation Criteria
It is necessary to set evaluation criteria for position displacement
compensation in order to evaluate whether the measurement
object is contained within the field of view at the time of measurement.
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 88
Judgement of Position Displacement Compensation and
Subsequent Measurement
Judgement
Processing
OK
Measurement is performed after position
displacement compensation.
NG
Measurement is performed without position
displacement compensation. Output to the OR
terminal is NG, irrespective of measurement result.
69
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
Examples
· Area
If the area is too small, position
displacement compensation
will not be performed. The
judgement will be NG.
· X Center of Gravity, Y Center of Gravity
Movement range for an OK judgement.
Position
displacement
compensation performed.
If the center of gravity is outside the
range, position displacement compensation will not be performed.
The judgement will be NG.
70
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
· Axis Angle
Measurement value for
axis angle: 10.000
Measurement value for
axis angle: --10.000
If this range is to be
judged OK, set to
“--10.000: 10.000.”
Gray Edge Position
Edges are identified by changes in the density within the region.
The search direction and color change for edge detection can be
set for each region.
When calculating the displacement
in the X direction.
Direction: ®
Color: Light ® Dark
When calculating the displacement in
the Y direction.
Direction: Color: Light ® Dark
Operational Flow
In Position compensation/Region, select Edge position.
1 Draw the region.
2 Set the edge detection conditions and the evaluation criteria.
71
Position Displacement Compensation
1
Section 3-3
Drawing the Region
Draw the position displacement compensation region so as to
include the edge. Draw one box for each region. When drawing
of the regions has been completed, the edge positions will be
measured. These positions will be taken as the reference positions. Therefore, draw the regions after placing the measurement object in a position where the part to be measured lies
totally inside the screen.
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 91
Correct
Incorrect
For edge detection
in Y direction.
For edge detection in X direction.
If the edge is not in the displacement region, edge
detection will not be possible. Make a region of a size
and position that allows for movement of the range of
the measurement object.
2
Setting Edge Detection Conditions and Evaluation Criteria
Set the conditions and evaluation criteria required to search for
an edge.
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 93
72
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
Judgement of Position Displacement and Subsequent Measurement
Judgement
Processing
OK
Measurement is performed after position
displacement compensation.
NG
Measurement is performed without position
displacement compensation. Output to the OR
terminal is NG, irrespective of measurement result.
Unless a difference in density that is greater
than the set level is detected, position displacement compensation will not be performed. The judgement will be NG.
Gray Search
Register an image pattern (the “model”) in advance. The part of
an input image that is most similar to the model is found, and the
displacement of its position from that of the reference position is
obtained.
Model:
X displacement
Reference position (position of
model)
Y displacement
Input image
Operational Flow
In Position compensation/Region, select Gray search.
73
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
1
2
3
4
1
Register the model.
Set the range in which a search is to be made for the model.
Set the evaluation criteria.
Change pixel-skipping parameter.
(This step is optional.)
Registering the Model
A characteristic part of the measurement image, such as a mark
or corner, is registered as a model. The model can be of any size.
The registered position will be taken as the reference. Therefore,
register the model after putting the measurement object in a
position where the part to be registered lies totally inside the
screen.
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 99
Correct
Incorrect
Model
(Up to 3 figures can be combined to produce 1 region.)
Figure number
Draw figure
[0]
394,378
Position the measurement object so
that the part to be registered is in the
center of the screen.
74
Draw figure
[0]
394,378
A part to be registered lies
outside the screen.
Position Displacement Compensation
2
Section 3-3
Setting the Search Region
Set the region for which the model is to be searched for. It is possible to perform a search for the entire input image but processing time can be reduced and accuracy can be increased by setting limits on the search range.
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 102
The model is displayed with solid lines.
Search region
The search range is
displayed with dotted
lines.
3
Setting the Evaluation Criteria
If the correlation value with the model is low, the wrong place may
be found. In order to judge whether the model for position displacement compensation has been correctly identified, it is necessary to set evaluation criteria.
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 103
75
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
Judgement of Position Displacement and Subsequent Measurement
Judgement
Processing
OK
Measurement is performed after position
displacement compensation.
NG
Measurement is performed without position
displacement compensation. Output to the OR
terminal is NG, irrespective of measurement result.
Movement range for OK judgement.
Position
displacement compensation is not performed
because correlation value is low.
Judgement is NG.
Position
displacement compensation is not performed
because search position is NG.
Judgement is NG.
4
Changing Pixel-skipping Parameter (Optional)
The pixel-skipping parameter for searching for the model can be
changed. The pixel-skipping parameter is determined according
to the speed setting in the evaluation conditions menu. However,
from this screen it is also possible to change the pixel-skipping
parameter directly.
By making the value larger, the processing time can be reduced.
However, the accuracy of the search will be reduced, and
depending on the image, the object may not be found. After
changing the settings, check whether measurement and search
are performed properly.
76
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
The procedure is the same as for ordinary measurement. ® p. 104
Set how many pixels to skip when searching.
X pixel-skipping parameter
Y pixel-skipping parameter
3-3-3
Selecting the Direction for Position
Displacement Compensation
Select the direction in which position displacement compensation is performed. Reference values for compensation can be set
for the X direction, Y direction, or q direction regardless of
whether compensation is performed or not.
X, Y directions
q direction
For binary center of
gravity and axis
angle only.
Midpoint, Relative Angle of 2 Regions
Position displacement compensation is performed using the
coordinates of the center of gravity (midpoint) and the angle (relative angle) of the line joining 2 regions. The relative angle is
expressed in the range 0 to 360° with the X axis taking a value of
0° and the direction from the X axis to the Y axis as positive.
Position
compensation region 0
Relative angle
of both regions
Midpoint of both regions
Position
compensation region 1
77
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
Examples:
Position
compensation region 0
(gray search)
X: position compensation region 0
Y: position compensation region 0
q: none
Position
compensation region 0
(gray search)
X: midpoint of 2 regions
Y: midpoint of 2 regions
q: Relative angle of 2
regions
Position compensation
region 1 (gray search)
Position compensation
region 0 (binary
center of gravity
and axis angle)
X: position compensation
region 0
Y: position compensation
region 0
q: position compensation
region 0
Position
compensation region 0
(gray edge
position)
X: position compensation
region 0
Y: position compensation
region 1
q: none
Position compensation region 1
(gray edge position)
Procedure
1 Go to Position compensation/Direction.
Adjust
Position
compensation
Adjust
Measurement
Region region
Expression
Direction
78
1
Section 3-3
Position Displacement Compensation
2 Select reference values for X, Y, and q.
3 Select End to enter the settings.
3-3-4
Changing Settings or Clearing
The set data can be changed or cleared.
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to the number of the region to be changed
or cleared and press the ENT Key.
The selection Change settings/Clear will be displayed.
Scn 0 = SET = Region (position)
1
2
0. Gravity and area
1.
Change settings
3
Clear
Freeze
2 To change settings select Change settings.
The items that can be changed will be displayed.
79
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
3 To clear all the settings, select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Select Execute
to clear the settings and exit this screen.
3-4
Drawing Measurement Regions and
Setting Evaluation Criteria
If two Cameras are used, Region 0 will be displayed for Camera
0 and Region 1 will be displayed for Camera 1. ® p. 36
3-4-1
Selecting Region Number
The F150 has 16 measurement regions and 12 measurement
methods. The measurement method can be set separately for
each region.
Two-camera
Operation
If two Cameras are used, there are 8 regions (0 to 7) for Measurement region 0 and 8 regions (8 to 15) for Measurement
region 1.
Example: Using Two Measurement Regions
Region 0
Drawn using Defect (Circum) to check for
surface defects.
Region 1
Drawn with Gray search to check that the
printed markings are correct and there are
no missing parts.
80
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Procedure
1 Select Measurement region.
The screen for selecting the region number will be displayed.
Press the SHIFT + ESC Keys to reverse (dark « clear) the background.
Scn 0 = SET = Meas region
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
-¯
Freeze
Press the SHIFT Key together with the Up/
Down Keys to switch display images. ® p. 164
Press the Down Key to display region numbers 8 to 15.
Two-camera
Operation
If two Cameras are used, since there are only 8 regions for each
Camera, the up/down arrows will not be displayed.
2 Select the desired region number.
The selections for the measurement method will be displayed.
Scn 0 = SET = Meas region
Gravity and area
Gravity and axis
Density avg
Edge pitch
Edge position
Defect (Arc)
Defect (Box)
Defect (Circum)
-¯
Freeze
81
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
3 From this point, the procedures for the various measure-
ment methods are given separately. Refer to the appropriate explanation.
3-4-2
Binary Center of Gravity and Area and Axis
Angle
Images taken by the Camera are made up of 256 gradations. To
obtain the binary center of gravity and the area, or the binary center of gravity and the axis angle, these images are converted into
binary images. This conversion involves dividing the image into
black pixels (0) and white pixels (1). The F150 performs measurements on the areas occupied by white pixels.
Binary Center of Gravity and Area
The area and the center of gravity of the area occupied by the
white pixels is obtained.
Measurement region
Center of gravity for parts occupied by white pixels
Area of parts occupied by white
pixels
82
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Binary Center of Gravity and Axis Angle
The area, center of gravity, and axis angle of the area occupied
by the white pixels are obtained. The processing time will be
longer than the processing time to obtain the binary center of
gravity and area by the time taken to obtain the axis angle.
Measurement region
Axis angle for the parts occupied
by the white pixels
Center of gravity for the parts
occupied by the white pixels
Area for parts occupied by the
white pixels
Operational Flow
1 Set the binary level.
2 Draw the measurement region
3 Set the evaluation criteria.
1
Setting the Binary Level
Set the level for conversion of 256-gradation images into binary
images. The F150 performs measurements on the white areas.
Therefore, set the binary level so that the measurement object is
represented by white pixels.
Procedure
1 Go to Measurement region/<Region number>/Gravity &
area (or Gravity & axis).
2 Select Binary.
The screen for setting the binary level will be displayed.
2
3 Move the cursor to the upper limit and change the value as
desired using the Left and Right Keys.
83
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Press the Right Key to increase the smallest digit by 1 (use
with SHIFT Key to increase by 10). Press the Left Key to
decrease the smallest digit by 1 (use with SHIFT Key to
decrease by 10).
4 Change the lower limit in the same way.
5 Select OK to enter the settings and exit this screen.
Lower limit
Upper limit
3
4
5
Select Reverse to reverse dark and clear in the
display.
If Auto is selected, the F150 will automatically
determine a binary level.
Note It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is
performed only for an intermediate density range. However, it is
not possible to reverse this range and perform measurement for
densities excluding this range.
Correct
White (object for measurement)
Density
84
Black
Incorrect
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2
Drawing the Measurement Region
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures.
Procedure
1 Select Region.
1
2 Select New.
3 Select the shape of the desired figure.
Refer to the following page for details on drawing
regions: ® p. 28
4 Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
The screen for drawing the region will be displayed.
2
3
New
Box
EllipseOR
CircleNOT
Circumference
Polygon
4
85
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
5 Draw the region with the shape selected.
Draw figure
[0]
375, 341
Up to three figures
(0,1, and 2) can be
drawn.
6 If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired
shape.
Once 3 figures have been drawn, Add will no longer be displayed.
6
Draw figure
[0]
Add
ENT: Edit
ESC: End
: Switch
7 After drawing is completed, press the ESC Key while the
screen for step 6 is displayed.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen
in step 1 will be returned. The cursor arrow will be displayed
at the position of the center of gravity. If more than one figure
has been drawn, the rectangle that circumscribes the figures will be displayed, and the cursor arrow will be displayed
at the position of the center of gravity of this rectangle.
86
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Circumscribing Rectangle
The “circumscribing rectangle” is the smallest rectangle that
contains all of the figures.
Rectangle circumscribing figures 0, 1, and 2.
Figure 0
Figure 1
Figure 2
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1 In the screen for step 6 above, select the figure to be
changed or cleared using the Up and Down Keys and press
the ENT Key.
Figure number
Draw figure
[0]
Add
Figure 0
The figure
selected is
displayed with
solid lines.
ENT: Edit
ESC: End
: Switch
Figure 1
Figures not
selected are
displayed with
dotted lines.
87
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2 The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed. Select
the desired operation.
Correct
Clear
If Correct is selected, the screen for selecting the
region number will be displayed. Correct the size and
position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
3
Setting the Evaluation Criteria
Make settings for the area, center of gravity, and axis angle.
Binary Center of Gravity and Area
Scn 0 = SET = 0. Gravity and area
Binary
R Area
:
2035
Conditions
[
2000.000: 2300.000]
Gravity X :
180
[
0.000: 511.000]
Gravity Y:
250
[
0.000: 483.000]
End
Area range for an OK judgement.
(0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object in the X direction
for an OK judgement.
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object in the Y direction
for an OK judgement.
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Measurement result for the displayed
image (after calibration).
Use this value as a reference for setting
upper and lower limits.
The center of gravity must be
between the lower and upper limits
for an OK judgement.
The area should be between the
lower and upper limits for an OK
judgement.
88
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Binary Center of Gravity and Axis Angle
Scn 0 = SET = 0. Gravity and axis
Area range for OK judgement.
(0 to 9,999,999.999)
Binary
:
2035
R Area
[
2000: 2300]
Conditions
Gravity X :
180
[
0.000: 511.000]
Gravity Y:
250
[
0.000: 483.000]
Axis
:
75
[
60.000: 90.000]
End
Range of movement of the measurement object in the X direction for an
OK judgement.
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object in the Y direction for an
OK judgement.
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Measurement result for the displayed
image (after calibration).
Use this value as a reference for setting
upper and lower limits.
Rotation range of the measurement
object for an OK judgement. (Range:
--180.000 to 180.000. However, only
values in the range --90.000 to
90.000 will be output.)
The axis angle must be between the lower and
upper limits for an OK judgement.
The center of gravity must be between the lower
and upper limits for an OK judgement.
The area must be between the lower and upper
limits for an OK judgement.
89
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
· Axis Angle
Measurement value for axis
angle: 10.000
Measurement value for axis
angle: --10.000
If this range is to be judged
OK, set to “--10.000:
10.000.”
Procedure
1 Select Conditions.
1
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values:
® p. 26
3 Select End to enter the settings.
90
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
3-4-3
Gray Edge Position
Edges are identified by changes in the density within the measurement region. The search direction and color change for
edge detection can be set for each region.
Example: When the coordinates of
this edge are required
Measurement
region
Direction: ®
Color: Light ® Dark
Operational Flow
1 Draw the measurement region.
2 Set the edge detection conditions and the evaluation criteria.
1
Drawing the Measurement Region
Draw the measurement region so as to include the edge.
Correct
Incorrect
For edge detection in
Y direction.
For edge detection in X direction.
If the edge is not in the measurement region, edge detection will
not be possible. Make a region of a size and position that allows
for movement of the range of the measurement object.
Procedure
1 Go to Measurement region/<Region Number>/Gray edge
position.
2 Select Region.
2
Region
Conditions
91
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
3 Draw a box-shaped measurement region.
When the coordinates of the lower right corner are specified, the region will be registered and the screen for step 2
will be returned.
92
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2
Setting Edge Detection Conditions and Evaluation Criteria
Set the conditions necessary for finding an edge, and the evaluation criteria.
93
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Scn 0 = SET = 1. Edge position
Region
Conditions
Direction
Color
Edge level
Noise level
Position
[ 0.000
:®B
: Light ® DarkB
: [50]%
: [20]
:
: 511.000]
Edge detection direction (-, ¯, ®, ¬)
Edge color change
(Light ® Dark, Dark ® Light)
Edge position range for an OK
judgement
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
End
Measurement result for the displayed image (after calibration).
If - or ¯ are selected, the Y coordinate
value will be output.
If ¬ or ® are selected, the X coordinate value
will be output.
(The origin and coordinate system will differ according to the calibration
settings.)
Set the level of density for checking the existence of edges. (0 to 255)
The maximum and minimum densities for the measurement region are obtained, and if this difference is less than the noise level,
then there are deemed to be no edges.
The default setting of 20 will be appropriate in most cases. If edges are erroneously detected for this noise level, however, set the
noise level to a higher value.
Max. density -- Min. density < Noise level ® No edges detected ® NG result
Max. density -- Min. density
Noise level ® Edges detected ® Existence of measurement object confirmed
Example: For noise level setting of 30
Measurement region
Max. density = 60
Min. density = 15
60 -- 15 > 30
Edges detected,
existence of measurement object
confirmed
Measurement region
Max. density = 25
Min. density = 10
25 -- 10 < 30
No edges detected, NG result
Set the level of density change for identification as an edge. (0 to 100)
The default setting of 50% will be appropriate in most cases.
Edges are detected in the following way:
1. The density distribution for the entire measurement range is obtained.
2. The range from the smallest density value to the largest is calibrated to a range
of 0% to 100%.
3. Places where the change in density is above the set density level are detected
as edges.
Maximum density value
Measurement
region (example)
Edge level
Smallest density value
94
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Procedure
1 Select Conditions.
1
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
Scn 0 = SET = 1. Edge position
Region
Conditions
Direction
Color
Edge level
Noise level
Position
[ 0.000
:®B
: Light ® DarkB
: [50]%
: [20]
:
: 511.000]
End
3 Select End to enter the settings.
3-4-4
Edge Pitch
Use the following procedure to find edges through density variations and obtain the number of objects, width, and pitch.
Width
Edge
Measurement
region
Pitch (distance
between midpoints)
Number of objects
Operational Flow
1 Draw the measurement region.
2 Set the edge detection conditions and the evaluation criteria.
95
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
1
Drawing the Measurement Region
Draw the measurement region so as to include all of the measurement objects.
(Example 1)
(Example 2)
Measurement
region
Edges are detected in the direction of the
long side of the measurement region.
Procedure
1 Go to Measurement region/<Region number>/Edge
pitch.
2 Select Region.
2
3 Draw a box-shaped measurement region.
When the coordinates of the lower right corner are specified, the region is registered and the screen for step 2 will be
returned.
96
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2
Setting Edge Detection Conditions and Evaluation Criteria
Set the conditions necessary for finding an edge, and the evaluation criteria.
Scn 0 = SET = 2. Edge pitch
Region
Target color
: WhiteB
Conditions
Edge level
: [10]%
Min. level
: [5]
Number of edges :20
[ 20: 20]
Average pitch
:9.332
[ 9.000: 10.000]
Average width
:3.234
[ 2.000: 4.000]
End
Color of objects to be counted (White/
Black)
Minimum level: For prevention of incorrect detection due to noise (0 to 255). (If
the density variation is less than this
value, it will be considered to be noise.)
Range of number of objects for an OK
judgement (0 to 255)
Average pitch range for an OK judgement (0 to 9,999.999)
Press the Down Key to display the setting menu for the average width range
(0 to 9,999.999)
Measurement result for the displayed image
The values for average pitch and average width are values after calibration.
Threshold value for finding an edge (0 to 100).
If the measured number of objects is less than the actual number of objects, set the edge level (or the minimum
level) to a smaller value. If the measured number of objects is greater than the actual number of objects, set the
edge level (or the minimum level) to a larger value.
Edges are detected in the following way:
1. The density differentials for the entire measurement range are obtained.
2. The maximums and minimums that satisfy the edge level setting are detected as edges.
Measurement region
Edge level
Edge level
One object counted
97
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Procedure
1 Select Conditions.
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
1
3 Select End to enter the settings.
3-4-5
Gray Search and Precise Search
Register an image pattern (the “model”) in advance. The part of
an input image that is most similar to the model is found, and the
degree of similarity is expressed with a correlation value. Perform processing directly on the density image taken by the Camera.
Model
Search
Gray
Search
With a gray search, the position is obtained in pixel units.
Precise
Search
With a precise search, the position is obtained in sub-pixel
(smaller than a pixel) units. The processing time is longer than
that for gray search.
Operational Flow
1
2
3
4
98
Register the model
Set the range in which a search is to be made for the model.
Set the evaluation criteria.
Change pixel-skipping parameter.
(This step is optional.)
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
1
Registering the Model
The area of the image to be inspected is registered as a model.
The model can be of any size.
Procedure
1 Go to Measurement region/<Region number>/Gray
search (or Precise search).
2 Select Model registration.
2
3 Select New.
4 Select the shape of the figure to be drawn.
Refer to the following page for details on drawing
regions: ® p. 28
5 Select the drawing mode (OR/NOT).
3
4
New
Box
EllipseOR
CircleNOT
Circumference
Polygon
5
6 Draw the figure in the range desired as the model.
Draw figure
[0]
155, 321
Up to three figures
(0,1, and 2) can be
drawn.
7 If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
Repeat steps 4 to 6 as necessary to create the desired
99
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
shape.
Once 3 figures have been drawn, Add will no longer be displayed.
7
Draw figure
[0]
Add
ENT: Edit
ESC: End
: Switch
8 If the drawing for the region is finished, press the ESC Key
while in the screen for step 7.
The arrow cursor will be displayed.
9 Move the arrow cursor to the point whose coordinates are to
be output as the search position, and press the ENT Key.
The region is set and the screen for step 2 is returned.
Draw figure
Move the arrow cursor to the point
whose coordinates are to be output.
100
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1 In the screen for step 7 above, select the figure to be
changed or cleared using the Up and Down Keys and press
the ENT Key.
Figure number
Draw figure
[0]
Add
Figure 0
The figure
selected is
displayed with
solid lines.
ENT: Edit
ESC: End
: Switch
Figure 1
Figures not
selected are
displayed with
dotted lines.
2 The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed. Select
the desired operation.
Correct
Clear
If Correct is selected, the screen for selecting the
region number will be displayed. Correct the size and
position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
101
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2
Setting the Search Region
Set the region for which the model is to be searched for. It is possible to perform a search for the entire input image but processing time can be reduced and accuracy can be increased by setting limits on the search range.
The model is displayed with solid lines.
Search region
The search range is displayed
with dotted lines.
Procedure
1 Select Search region.
1
2 Draw a box-shaped search region.
When the coordinates of the lower right corner are speci-
102
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
fied, the region will be registered, and the screen for step 1
will be returned.
Search region
Specify the
coordinates
of the upper
left corner.
Specify the coordinates
of the lower right corner.
3
Setting the Evaluation Criteria
Evaluation criteria are set for the correlation with the model and
the coordinates where the model is found.
Scn 0 = SET = 4. Gray search
Model registration
Se Correlation
Ca Position X
[ 0.000
Position Y
[ 0.000
Speed
:79
:
:
:
:
:
Correlation value range for an OK judgement
(0 to 100)
Range of movement of the measurement
object in the X direction for an OK judgement.
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
[80: 100]
180
511.000]
250
511.000]
3B
End
Range of movement of the measurement
object in the Y direction for an OK judgement.
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Search speed
LOW
1
2
3
HIGH
Slow
Fast
Measurement result for the displayed image (after calibration).
Use this value as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
103
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
X, Y Positions:
Correlation:
When the correlation criteria is 70 to 100:
Image Image
0
1
Correlation: 96
Judgement:
OK
65
NG
Image
2
Image
3
62
NG
78
OK
Range of movement in X direction for an OK judgement.
Range of movement
in Y direction for an
OK judgement.
NG
OK
Procedure
1 Select Conditions.
1
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
3 Select End to enter the settings.
4
Changing Pixel-skipping Parameter (Optional)
The pixel-skipping parameter for searching for the model can be
changed. The pixel-skipping parameter is determined according
to the speed setting in the evaluation criteria menu. However,
from this screen it is also possible to change the pixel-skipping
parameter directly. (Note that if the pixel-skipping parameter is
changed, the speed will be changed automatically.)
By making the value larger, the processing time can be reduced.
However, the accuracy of the search will be reduced, and
depending on the image, the object may not be found. After
changing the settings, check whether measurement and search
are performed properly.
X pixel-skipping parameter
Y pixel-skipping parameter
104
Set how many pixels to skip
when searching.
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Procedure
1 Press the SHIFT + ESC Keys with the screen in this state.
The screen for setting the pixel-skipping parameter will be
displayed.
Scn 0 = SET = 0. Relative search
Model registration
Search region
Conditions
2 Change the pixel-skipping parameters for X and Y as
desired.
Set in the range 1 to 15.
3 Select End. The estimated search time for a search based
on the set pixel-skipping parameters will be displayed.
This is the estimated search time for the region
number currently selected. The search time for
one scene will be displayed in the upper-right
corner of the screen when measurement is
actually performed in Monitor mode or Run
mode.
OK
4 Select OK to enter the settings and to exit this screen.
3-4-6
Surface Defect
Surface defects in the measurement region are checked for
through variations in density.
Operational Flow
1 Draw the measurement region.
105
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2 Set the surface defect detection conditions and the evaluation criteria.
1
Drawing the Measurement Region
Choose the shape of the measurement region from arc, box, circumference, or line.
Arc
Specify start angle, end angle, radius
and width.
Box
Specify 2 opposite corners.
Width
Radius
End angle
Start angle
Circumference
Specify center, radius and width.
Width
Line
Specify start point, end point and
width.
Width
Radius
Start point
End point
Center
Note
1. Do not include areas with marks and designs in the measurement region. It will not be possible to distinguish them
from surface detects, and measurement will not be performed properly.
2. The following kinds of arcs cannot be drawn.
· Arcs whose center lies outside of the screen.
· Arcs with a radius of more than 483 pixels.
Procedure
1 Go to Measurement region/<Region number>/Defect ( ).
2 Select Region.
2
3 Draw the measurement region.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen
for step number 2 will be returned.
106
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2
Setting Surface Defect Detection Conditions and Evaluation Criteria
When the measurement region has been drawn, small boxes will
be created inside the measurement region. These boxes are
called “elements.” The density for each element is calculated,
and this density is compared with the density of the elements
around it. The degree of density dispersion is used to detect surface defects. The detection conditions “Element size” and
“Compare pitch” (the number of elements between a given element and the element it is compared with) can be set.
Defect Calculation Method
Element
Measurement region
Compared with element above
Element
A
The larger of these two values is
the defect of element A.
Compared with element in same row
The defect is calculated for all of the elements. If the largest defect is larger than
the evaluation criteria, the measurement region is judged to contain a defect.
When deciding the evaluation criteria, perform measurements of several samples and base the evaluation criteria on the defects for those samples.
Element Size and Compare Pitch
Element size
Compare pitch
107
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Condition Setting Screen
Scn 0 = SET = 0. Defect (Line)
Region
Ca Element size
Compare pitch
Defect
Density Max.
Density Min.
)
4 to 80 (default setting: 10)
: [10]
: [1}
:80 [30]
:80 [255]
:50 [0]
1 to 6 (default setting: 1)
Defect evaluation criteria. If the
defect exceeds this value the
judgement will be NG. (0 to 255)
If the largest and smallest density
values in the inspected region lie
within the lower and upper limits,
the judgement will be OK. (0 to
255)
End
Measurement results for the displayed image.
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
Procedure
1 Select Conditions.
1
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
3 Select End to enter the settings.
3-4-7
Density Averaging
The density (0 to 255) is obtained for each pixel and measurements are made based on the average density.
108
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Example: Existence of Measurement Object
The existence of a measurement object is determined using differences in the average density.
Measurement object
No measurement object
Average density within
measurement region: 30
Average density within
measurement region: 200
Operational Flow
1 Draw the Measurement Region.
2 Set the evaluation criteria.
1
Drawing the Measurement Region
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures.
Procedure
1 Go to Measurement region/<Region number>/Density
averaging.
2 Select Region.
Region
Conditions
2
3 Select New.
4 Select the shape of the desired figure.
Refer to the following page for details of drawing methods: ® p. 28
5 Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
The screen for drawing the region will be displayed.
3
4
New
Box
EllipseOR
CircleNOT
Circumference
Polygon
5
109
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
6 Draw the region with the shape selected.
Draw figure
[0]
375, 341
Up to three figures
(0,1, and 2) can be
drawn.
7 If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
Repeat steps 4 to 6 as necessary to create the desired
shape. Once 3 figures are drawn, Add will no longer be displayed.
7
Draw figure
Add
ENT: Edit
ESC: End
: Switch
8 If the drawing for the region is finished, press the ESC Key
while in the screen for step 7.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen
in step 2 will be returned. The cursor arrow will be displayed
at the position of the center of gravity. If more than one figure
has been drawn, the rectangle that circumscribes the figures will be displayed, and the cursor arrow will be displayed
at the position of the center of gravity of this rectangle.
110
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Circumscribing Rectangle
The “circumscribing rectangle” is the smallest rectangle that
contains all of the figures.
Rectangle circumscribing figures 0, 1, and 2.
Figure 0
Figure 1
Figure 2
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1 In the screen for step 7 above, select the figure to be
changed or cleared using the Up and Down Keys and press
the ENT Key.
Figure number
Draw figure
[0]
Add
Figure 0
The figure
selected is displayed with
solid lines.
ENT: Edit ESC: End
: Switch
Figure 1
Figures not
selected are
displayed
with dotted
lines.
111
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2 The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed. Select
the desired operation.
If Correct is selected, the screen for selecting the
region number will be displayed. Correct the size
and position of the figure as desired.
Correct
Clear
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
2
Setting the Evaluation Criteria
Set the range of the average density for an OK judgement.
Scn 0 = SET = 0. Density avg
Region
Conditions
Density avg:
[0.000: 255.000]
Average density range
for an OK judgement
End
Procedure
1 Select Conditions.
Region
Conditions
1
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
3 Select End to enter the settings.
3-4-8
Relative Search
Use this method to obtain the positions of markings, holes, and
other features, and to judge whether these features are within
the acceptable range. This method is based on relative position
so models must be registered in two positions: the measurement
position and the standard position.
112
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
Example: Checking the Position of a Label
The relative search function can be used to confirm the position
of a label by checking the relative positions of the label and one
corner of the measurement object.
Correct position
Incorrect position
Model 1
Model 0
Operational Flow
1
2
3
4
1
Register the model.
Set the range in which a search is to be made for the model.
Set the evaluation criteria.
Change pixel-skipping parameter.
(This step is optional.)
Registering the Model
Register 2 models (models 0 and 1) in the places to be used as
reference for measurement. The models can be of any size.
Procedure
1 Go to Measurement region/<Region number>/Relative
position.
2 Select Model Registration (0 or 1).
Model Registration 0
Search region 0
Model Registration 1
Search region 1
Conditions
2
3 Select New.
4 Select the shape of the figure to be drawn.
Refer to the following page for details on drawing
regions: ® p. 28
113
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
5 Select the drawing mode (OR/NOT).
3
4
New
Box
EllipseOR
CircleNOT
Circumference
Polygon
5
6 Draw the figure in the range desired as the model.
Draw figure
[0]
185, 190
Up to three figures
(0,1, and 2) can be
drawn.
7 If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
Repeat steps 4 to 6 as necessary to create the desired
shape.
Once 3 figures are drawn, Add will no longer be displayed.
7
Draw figure
Add
ENT: Edit
ESC: End
: Switch
8 If the drawing for the region is finished, press the ESC Key
while in the screen for step 7.
The arrow cursor will be displayed.
114
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
9 Move the arrow cursor to the point whose coordinates are to
be output as the search position, and press the ENT Key.
The region is set and the screen for step 2 is returned.
Draw figure
145, 151
Move the arrow cursor to the
point whose coordinates are to be
output.
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1 In the screen for step 7 above, select the figure to be
changed or cleared using the Up and Down Keys and press
the ENT Key.
Figure number
Draw figure
[0]
Add
Figure 0
The figure
selected is
displayed with
solid lines.
ENT: Edit
ESC: End
: Switch
2 The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Select the desired operation.
Correct
Clear
If Correct is selected, the screen for selecting the
region number will be displayed. Correct the size
and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
115
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
2
Setting the Search Region
Set the region for which the model is to be searched for. It is possible to perform a search for the entire input image but processing time can be reduced and accuracy can be increased by setting limits on the search range.
The model is displayed with solid lines.
Draw figure
160, 140
The search range is
displayed with dotted
lines.
Procedure
1 Select Search Region (0 or 1).
Model Registration 0
Search region 0
Model Registration 1
Search region 1
Conditions
1
2 Draw a box-shaped search region.
When the coordinates of the lower right corner are speci-
116
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
fied, the region will be registered, and the screen for step 1
will be returned.
Draw figure
272, 254
Specify the
coordinates of
the upper left
corner.
Specify the coordinates
of the lower right corner.
117
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
3
Setting the Evaluation Criteria
Set evaluation criteria for the correlation with the model and for
the relative position of model 0 and model 1.
Scn 0 = SET = 0. Relative search
Correlation value range for an OK
judgement for model 0 (0 to 100)
Model registration 0
Search
region 00:
Correlation
79 [80: 100]
Correlation
1: 1 82 [80: 100]
Model
Registration
Width X (1-0) :
85.351
Search
[ 0.000:
511.000]
Condition
Width Y (1-0) :
69.239
[ 0.000:
511.000]
Distance
:
109.904
[0.000:
511.000]
Speed
:
3B
End
Correlation value range for an OK
judgement for model 1 (0 to 100)
Range of difference in X direction (model 1 -- model 0)
for an OK judgement (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
Range of difference in Y direction (model 1 -- model 0)
for an OK judgement (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
Distance between model 0 and model 1
for an OK judgement (0 to 9999.999)
Search speed
Slow
LOW
1
2
3
Fast
HIGH
Indicates measurement results for the displayed image (after calibration).
Use these values as reference for setting upper and lower limits.
Correlation:
X, Y Width, Distance:
When the correlation criteria is between 70 and 100:
Image 0
Image 1
Image 0
Image 3
65
NG
62
NG
78
OK
Difference in
X direction
Model 1
Difference in
Y direction
Distance
Correlation: 96
Judgement: OK
Model 0
Procedure
1 Select Conditions.
Model Registration 0
Search region 0
Model Registration 1
Search region 1
Conditions
1
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
3 Select End to enter the settings.
4
Changing Pixel-skipping Parameter (Optional)
The pixel-skipping parameter for searching for the model can be
changed. The pixel-skipping parameter is determined according
118
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
to the speed setting in the evaluation criteria menu. However,
from this screen it is also possible to change the pixel-skipping
parameter directly. (Note that if the pixel-skipping parameter is
changed, the speed will be changed automatically.)
By making the value larger, the processing time can be reduced.
However, the accuracy of the search will be reduced, and
depending on the image, the object may not be found. After
changing the settings, check whether measurement and search
are performed properly.
X pixel-skipping parameter
Set how many pixels to skip
when searching.
Y pixel-skipping parameter
Procedure
1 Press the SHIFT + ESC Keys with the screen in this state.
The screen for setting the pixel-skipping parameter will be
displayed.
Scn 0 = SET = 0. Relative search
Model Registration 0
Search region 0
Model Registration 1
Search region 1
Conditions
2 Change the pixel-skipping parameters for X and Y as
desired.
Set in the range 1 to 15.
End
119
Drawing Measurement Regions and Setting Evaluation CriteriaSection 3-4
3 Select End. The estimated search time for a search based
on the set pixel-skipping parameters will be displayed.
OK
This is the estimated search time for the region
number currently selected. The search time for
one scene will be displayed in the upper-right
corner of the screen when measurement is
actually performed in Monitor mode or Run
mode.
4 Select OK to enter the settings and to exit this screen.
3-4-9
Changing Settings or Clearing
The set data can be changed or cleared.
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to the number to be changed or cleared and
press the ENT Key.
The selection Change settings/Clear will be displayed.
Scn 0 = SET = Meas region
1
2
0.Gravity and area
1.
Change settings
2.
Clear
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3
Freeze
2 To change settings select Change settings.
The selections for items that can be changed will be displayed.
For details on the actual settings, refer to the explanation for
the desired measurement method.
3 To clear all the settings select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Select Execute
to clear all the settings and to exit this screen.
120
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
3-5
Output Expressions
This section explains how to set the contents of output made to
external devices via the terminal blocks, RS-232C, or CompoBus/D. Output is only made when measurements are executed
in Run mode. No output is made to external devices when measurements are executed in Monitor mode.
Even without setting output expressions, the judgement of the
drawn region will be output to the OR terminal of the terminal
blocks or OR control output of CompoBus/D.
Judgement
· The judgement for each region can be output.
· Calculations can be performed for the measurement results for
each region and OK/NG judgements can be given for the results of the calculations.
Output number
16 expressions can be set in
judgement outputs 0 to 15
Expression
Calculation result for displayed
image.
Refer to this when setting evaluation
criteria.
Evaluation criteria
Set evaluation conditions for the calculation result.
(-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
121
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
Data
· Measurement results can be output.
· Calculation results can be output.
Output number
Eight expressions can be set in
data outputs 0 to 7.
Expression
Calculation
image.
result
for
displayed
Note The destinations for judgement and data outputs are as follows:
Vision Sensor
Judgement output
destination
Data output
destination
F150-C10E-3
F150-C15E-3
Terminal block
RS-232C or terminal
block
F150-C10E-3-DRT
CompoBus/D
CompoBus/D or
RS-232C
Select the data output destination in SYS/Output. ® p. 155
Possible Settings
Region numbers. (R0 to R15: measurement regions, P0 to P1: position compensation regions)
The sub-menu displayed next will depend on the measurement item.
Functions
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14 +
R15 -P0
:
P1
/
P10 (
P11 )
Const ,
ABS
MAX
MIN
ANGL
ATAN
DIST
SQRT
Judge
Data
¬
®
DEL
BS
OK
Calculations can be performed using values
from other expressions.
If this item is selected, a list of output numbers will be displayed. Use this feature when
a long expression that will not fit between the
parentheses is required.
Use to move the cursor.
Delete item.
DEL: Deletes the item on the left of the cursor.
BS: Deletes the item on the right of the cursor.
Confirm expressions.
Numbers in the range 0 to 999.999 can be set.
122
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
Sub-menus Displayed when R0 to 15, P0 to 1 are Selected
Center of Gravity and Area, Center of Gravity and Axis
Angle
Item
Explanation
Judge JG
Judgement result
Gravity X
X coordinate of measured center of gravity
Gravity Y
Y coordinate of measured center of gravity
Reference RX
X coordinate of reference center of gravity
Reference RY
Y coordinate of reference center of gravity
Displacement DX
Measured X coordinate of center of gravity -reference X coordinate of center of gravity
Displacement DY
Measured Y coordinate of center of gravity -reference Y coordinate of center of gravity
Area MA
Area of measured object
Reference area RM
Area when region drawn
Differential area DM
Measured area -- reference area
Inverted area VM
Area of measurement region -- measured
area
Axis angle AG (see
note)
Axis angle of measured object
Reference axis RA
(see note)
Axis angle when region drawn
Differential angle DA
(see note)
Measured axis angle -- reference axis angle
Note Axis angle, reference axis, and differential angle are only displayed when a region with center of gravity and axis angle has
been selected.
Gray Edge Position
Item
Explanation
Judge JG
Judgement result
Edge EG
Coordinate of measured edge position
Reference RE
Coordinate when region drawn
Displacement DE
Coordinate of measured edge position -reference edge position
Density Averaging
Item
Explanation
Judge JG
Judgement result
Dens average D
Average density for measured region
Ref density RD
Average density when region drawn
Dens difference DD
Measured average density -- reference
average density
123
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
Gray Search, Precise Search
Item
Explanation
Judge JG
Judgement result
Search X
Measured X coordinate
Search Y
Measured Y coordinate
Reference RX
Reference X coordinate
Reference RY
Reference Y coordinate
Displacement DX
Measured X coordinate -- reference X
coordinate
Displacement DY
Measured Y coordinate -- reference Y
coordinate
Correlation CR
Correlation with model
Surface Defect
Item
Explanation
Judge JG
Judgement result
Defect F
Measured defect
Density MAX GA
Greatest density value inside measurement
region
Density MIN GI
Smallest density value inside measurement
region
Edge Pitch
Item
124
Explanation
Judge JG
Judgement result
Numbers N
Number of detected objects
Pitch AVG P
Average pitch of detected edges
Pitch MAX PH
Maximum pitch of detected edges
Pitch MIN PL
Minimum pitch of detected edges
Width AVG W
Average width of detected edges
Width MAX WH
Maximum width of detected edges
Width MIN WL
Minimum width of detected edges
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
Relative Search
Item
Explanation
Judge JG
Judgement result
Width X
Difference in measured X coordinates
(model 1 -- model 0)
Width Y
Difference in measured Y coordinates
(model 1 -- model 0)
Distance D
Measured distance
Reference RX
Difference in reference X coordinates
Reference RY
Difference in reference Y coordinates
Reference RD
Reference distance
Displacement DX
Difference in measured X coordinates -difference in reference X coordinates
Displacement DY
Difference in measured Y coordinates -difference in reference Y coordinates
Displacement DD
Measured distance -- reference distance
Correlation C0
Correlation with model 0
Correlation C1
Correlation with model 1
Functions
Function
ABS
Meaning
Gives the absolute value.
Arguments
1
ABS(argument)
MAX
Gives the larger of two arguments.
2
MAX(argument 1, argument 2)
MIN
Gives the smaller of two arguments.
2
MIN(argument 1, argument 2)
SQRT
Calculates the square root. If the argument is negative, the
calculation result will be 0 and the judgement will be NG.
1
SQRT(argument)
125
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
Function
ANGL
Meaning
Calculates the angle between a straight line joining two points,
such as the center of gravity or the center of a model, and a
horizontal line. The result will be in the range --180 to 180°.
First point
Arguments
2
Horizontal line
Second point
ANGL(Y component, X component)
· Example:
Set the following to calculate the angle between the straight line
joining the center of gravity for region 0 and the center of gravity for region 1 and a horizontal line.
ANGL(R1.Y--R0.Y,R1.X--R0.X)
If both arguments are 0, the result will also be 0 and the
judgement will be NG.
ATAN
Calculates the arc tangent for the Y component/X component.
The result is given as a radian of --p to p.
2
ATAN(Y component, X component)
· Example:
Set the following to calculate the angle between a straight line
joining the center of gravity for region 0 and the center of gravity
for region 1 and a horizontal line.
ATAN(R1.Y--R0.Y,R1.X--R0.X)
If both arguments are 0, the calculation result will also be 0 and
the judgement will be NG.
DIST
Calculates the distance between two points, such as the center of
gravity and the center of the model.
4
DIST(X coordinate of first point, Y coordinate of first point,
X coordinate of second point, Y coordinate of second point)
· Example:
Set the following to calculate the distance between the center of
gravity for region 0 and center of gravity for region 1.
DIST(R0.X,R0.Y,R1.X,R1.Y)
· The following calculation is performed internally.
(R1.X–R0.X) 2 + (R1.Y–R0.Y) 2
JG
If “JG” is set as a judgement output expression, judgement will be
performed in the following two stages.
1 Judgement is performed for each region based on the set
evaluation criteria giving a result of “0.000” (OK) or “--1.000”
(NG).
126
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
2 Judgement is performed on the judgement result (i.e.: 0.000
or --1.000), based on the upper and lower limits in the screen
for the output.
If “JG” is set as a data output expression, only the judgement described in 1 above will be performed. The result of this judgement
(OK: 0.000, NG: --1.000) will be directly output to the external device.
Example 1
To output judgment result for region 0 to “Judge 0”:
R0.JG
0.000: OK, - 1.000: NG
Judgement is performed according to the evaluation criteria set when region 0 was
drawn.
Evaluation
criteria
for
R0.JG
In order that only the value
0.000 is judged OK, set both
the upper and lower limits to
0.000.
Example 2
To obtain an OR judgement for regions 0 and 1:
R0.JG +R1.JG
If the upper and lower limits are both set to 0.000,
one of the following judgements will be made:
· If both regions receive OK judgement, the measurement result
will be 0.000, so the overall judgement will be OK.
· If one region receives OK judgement, the measurement result
will be --1.000, so the overall judgement will be NG.
127
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
· If both regions receive NG judgement, the measurement result
will be --2.000, so the overall judgement will be NG.
Judgement and Data
It is possible to perform calculations using measurement results
from other expressions. Use this feature when a long expression
that will not fit between the parentheses is required. These values are displayed as “PR.0” to “PR.15” for Judge 0 to 15, and as
“RS.0” to “RS.7” for Data 0 to 7.
Example 1: To obtain the length of the straight line joining 2 points and
add 120.25
Region 0
Region 1
Divide the calculations into Judge 0 and Judge 1 in the following way:
Judge 0
[DIST(R0.X,R0.Y,R1.X,R1.Y) ] The constant 120.25 cannot be entered because
there is not enough space.
Judge 1
[PR.0+120.25
] Add 120.25 to the calculation result of Judge 0.
PR.0 represents the calculation result of Judge 0
Note Only use expressions containing PR.j or RS.j for outputs of a
higher number. Calculations are performed in the following or-
128
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
der. If PR.j or RS.j are used in expressions for outputs with a
lower number, the previous calculation result will be used.
Data 0
Data 1
to
Data 7
Judge 0
Judge 1
to
Judge 15
If example 1 had been constructed in the opposite order:
Judge 0
[PR.1+120.25
] This will be calculated before Judge 1 and so the previous value for PR.1 will be used
instead.
Judge 1
[DIST(R0.X,R0.Y,R1.X,R1.Y)
]
Example 2: To output the number of measurements
In this case a value is to be output so use a data output expression.
Data 0
[RS.0+1
]
Each time the Set mode is entered or the power is turned OFF,
the value of RS.0 will return to 0 along with the number of measurements.
Procedure
1 Go to Expression/Judge or Expression/Data.
The screen for selecting output numbers will be displayed.
Expression
Judge
Data
129
Section 3-5
Output Expressions
2 Select the output number for which the expression is to be
set.
0. R0. JG
1. R1. JG
2. R0.X+R1.X
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Expressions are displayed next
to the numbers for which expressions have already been set.
3 Move the cursor into the space between the parentheses for
the expression and press the ENT Key.
Example: If Judge is selected.
Judge0.
[
]
4 The list of possible settings will be displayed. Select the item
to be set.
Example
Judge0.
[I
Judge
RO R7 R14 + JG
ABS
Defect
R1 R8 R15 -- FMAX
Max.
R2 density
R9 P0
: GA
MIN
Min.
R3 density
R10 P1
/ GIANGL
R4 R11 P10 ( ATAN
R5 R12 P11 ) DIST
R6 R13 Const ,
SQRT
]
Judge
Data
¬
®
DEL
BS
OK
Select the item.
Press the
ENT Key.
Judge0.
[R0.JG
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
]
R14 +
R15 -P0
:
P1
/
P10 (
P11 )
Const ,
ABS
MAX
MIN
ANGL
ATAN
DIST
SQRT
Judge
Data
¬
®
DEL
BS
OK
The selected item will be entered in the expression.
5 When the expression has been set, select OK.
The expression will be registered.
130
Section 3-6
Scenes
6 For judgement output, set the OK/NG evaluation criteria.
The calculation result for the displayed image will be displayed.
Set the upper and lower limits.
7 Press the ESC Key to exit this screen.
The setting will be saved and the screen for step 1 will be
returned.
3-6
Scenes
3-6-1
Changing Scenes
The different situations (type of measurement object and type of
measurement required) in which measurements are performed
are called “scenes” and the measurement conditions set in Set
mode are called “scene data.” Up to 16 scenes can be set, numbered from 0 to 15 (see note). Use scenes to switch between different measurement conditions for different measurement setups or measurement objects. Scene 0 will be displayed by default when the power is turned ON. The command for changing
scenes can be input via the terminal blocks or RS-232C.
Note It may not be possible to use all 16 scenes if there is a lack of
available memory. In this case, a warning message will be displayed on the screen. Make regions and models as small as possible and delete any regions and models that are not required,
before continuing operation.
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
2 Move the cursor to Scn j and press the ENT Key.
A list of scenes, from scene 0 to scene 8, will be displayed.
131
Section 3-6
Scenes
Use the Down Key to scroll down and display the rest of the
list, from scene 9 to scene 15.
2
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Scn 0
Scn 1
Scn 2
Scn 3
Scn 4
Scn 5
Scn 6
Scn 7
Scn 8
3
Freeze
3 Using the Up and Down Keys, move the cursor to the desired scene and press the ENT Key.
The selected scene will be displayed. After the scene has
been selected, the mode will return to the original one.
Scn 1 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
132
Section 3-6
Scenes
3-6-2
Copying Scene Data
This function is useful for creating new scenes by copying scene
data from another scene and changing some settings to suit the
new requirements.
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to Scn j and press the ENT Key.
Scene numbers 0 to 8 will be displayed. Use the Down key
to display scene numbers 9 to 15.
1
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Scn 0
Scn 1
Scn 2
Scn 3
Scn 4
Scn 5
Scn 6
Scn 7
Scn 8
2
Freeze
2 Move the cursor to the scene number to which data is to be
copied, and press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
The Copy/Clear selection menu will be displayed.
3 Select Copy.
4 Enter the number of the scene from which data is to be copied (Original scene), and select Execute.
The data will be copied.
133
Section 3-7
Initializing Measurement Conditions (Clearing Scenes)
3-7
Initializing Measurement Conditions
(Clearing Scenes)
Use the following procedure to clear measurement conditions
set in Set mode, and to return scenes to their default settings.
This procedure is performed separately for each scene.
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to Scn j and press the ENT Key.
Scene numbers 0 to 8 will be displayed. Use the Down key
to display scene numbers 9 to 15.
1
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Scn 0
Scn 1
Scn 2
Scn 3
Scn 4
Scn 5
Scn 6
Scn 7
Scn 8
2
Freeze
2 Move the cursor to the number of the scene to be cleared,
and press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
The Copy/Clear selection menu will be displayed.
3 Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
4 Select Execute.
The scene will be cleared.
134
SECTION 4
Monitor Mode and Run Mode
This section explains how to check if measurements are being correctly performed with the
set measurement conditions using Monitor mode, and how to make actual measurements
using Run mode.
4-1
Confirming Correct Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
4-1-2
4-1-3
4-2
138
Entering Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
Test Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
Displaying Measurement Results and Changing Evaluation
Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
4-2-1
4-2-2
151
152
Entering Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
4-1-1
Entering Monitor Mode
Use the following procedure to check that measurements are being correctly performed with the set measurement conditions.
Note The key allocations for the Console Keys used to make input can
be changed. In the following explanations, it is assumed that the
key allocations are at the default settings. If they are not, adapt
the procedure accordingly. ®p. 167
Procedure
Entering Monitor Mode from Set Mode
In Set mode, press the ESC Key to leave Set mode and enter
Monitor mode.
Scn 0 = SET =
Adjust
Position compensation
Measurement region
Expression
Through
Press the ESC Key.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
136
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
Entering Monitor Mode from Run Mode
1 Move the cursor to RUN and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
1
Scn 0 B RUN B
----
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
2
Freeze
2 Select MON to enter Monitor mode.
4-1-2
Test Measurement
Use the following procedure to execute measurement according
to the conditions set for the scene currently displayed. The measurement results are not output via the terminal blocks or
RS-232C and so this procedure only tests operation for the F150
itself. The measurement command can be input, however, via
the terminal blocks, RS-232C, or CompoBus/D.
Procedure
Press the TRIG Key on the Console or input the measurement
command from an external device.
137
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
Measurement will be executed and the measurement results
displayed on the screen.
Scn 0 B MON B
OK
67 ms
Measurement Time
(The measurement time for freeze
display is shown here. The time for
through display is approx. 100 ms
longer than that for freeze display.)
Overall Judgement
(NG if there is an NG in one or
more measurement regions or
output expressions.)
Freeze
Press the SHIFT Key together with the Up/Down
Keys to switch display image. ®p. 164
Two-camera
Operation
138
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, switch between Camera 0 images and Camera 1 images by pressing the
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
SHIFT + Up/Down Keys. The camera number is displayed in the
lower right corner of the screen.
Camera 0 image
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Cam 0 Freeze
: Camera
Camera 1 image
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Cam 1 Freeze
: Camera
Press the SHIFT Key together with the Up/Down Keys
to switch display image (including memory images).
Note
1. Storing Measured Images to Memory
Up to 23 screens can be stored to memory. Once 23 screens
have been stored, the existing screens will be overwritten in
order starting with the oldest.
To store measured images to memory, go to Display settings by pressing the SHIFT + ESC Keys, and make the appropriate settings for Image storage. To store NG images
only, select Only NG, and to store images regardless of the
judgement result, select All. ®p. 160
2. Repeating Measurement for Images in Memory
Measurement can be repeated for images stored to
memory.
Display the desired memory image using the SHIFT + Up/
139
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
Down Keys and press SHIFT + TRIG Keys to execute measurement. Measurement can also be repeated for freeze
images without re-inputting the image using the SHIFT +
TRIG Keys. This feature can be used after evaluation criteria have been changed to check that the new criteria are appropriate.
4-1-3
Displaying Measurement Results and Changing
Evaluation Criteria
The data that is displayed on the screen can be changed. Also,
the evaluation criteria can be adjusted while referring to measurement results.
Go to Display settings by pressing the SHIFT + ESC Keys, and
change the settings for Display result.
None (Default Setting)
If Display result is set to None, only the overall judgement will
be displayed.
Freeze
Two-camera
Operation
140
If the camera mode is Two-Camera Switching mode, switch between Camera 0 images and Camera 1 images using the Up/
Down Keys.
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
All Results of Regions
Judgement results for all the regions are displayed in one list.
Scn 0 B MON B
All results of regions
P0. OK P10. OK
P1. OK P11. OK
0. OK
8.
1. NG
9.
2.
10.
3.
11.
4.
12.
5.
13.
6.
14.
7.
15.
Two-camera
Operation
NG
67 ms
P0, P1, P10, P11:
Position compensation regions
(P10 and P11 are for Camera 1
when the Two-camera Unit is used.)
0 to 15: Measurement regions
Press the SHIFT + Left/Right Keys
to change the brightness of the
background (dark « clear).
Freeze
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, switch between Camera 0 images and Camera 1 images using the Up/
Down Keys.
141
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
Position Compensation
The results for position displacement compensation can be displayed. There are screens for displaying the results for each
position compensation region and a screen for displaying the
displacement distance. Use the Up and Down Keys to switch
between the screens. The image displayed is the image after filtering and background suppression for position displacement
compensation.
Results for each position compensation
region:
Displacement distance (difference between the reference position and the
measurement position):
The arrow cursor is at
the measurement position.
Position compensation
region is displayed.
Scn 0BMONB
Scn 0BMONB
Position compensation
Position compensation
0.Gray search
Distance
Judge: OK
Correlation: 85
Position X: 202.000
Position Y: 245.000
Freeze
-¯:Item
If the SHIFT + ENT Keys are pressed from
the screen for the individual region, the
screen for changing conditions will be displayed, and the evaluation criteria can be
changed while monitoring the measurement values. However, even if a trigger or a
STEP signal is input, measurement will not
be performed while this screen is displayed.
142
Freeze
-¯:Item
If the judgement for position displacement compensation is NG, the screen
will not be scrolled and so all of these
values will be 0.
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, use the Up/
Down Keys to switch screens in the way shown below.
Results for region 0
/
Results for region 1
Camera 0 images
/
Distance
/
Results for region 10
/
Results for region 11
Camera 1 images
/
Distance
All Positions of Regions
Outlines of all the set measurement regions are displayed.
Scn 0BMONB
All positions of regions
If a figure other than a box
(such as a circle or polygon)
is set, or if more than one figure is set for one region, only
the circumscribing rectangle
is displayed.
Freeze
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, switch between Camera 0 images and Camera 1 images using the Up/
Down Keys.
143
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
Individual Region
The measurement values for each region are displayed separately. Use the Up/Down Keys to switch to screens for different
regions. If the SHIFT + ENT Keys are pressed from this screen,
the screen for changing conditions will be displayed, and the
evaluation criteria can be changed while monitoring the measurement values. However, even if a trigger or a STEP signal is
input, measurement will not be performed while this screen is
displayed.
Scn 0BMONB
Individual region
0.Gray search
Switch regions with the Up/Down
Keys.
Judge: NG
Correlation: 45
Position X: 202.000
Position Y: 256.000
Inverted display is used for NG
items.
Freeze
-¯:Region
All Judges
Judgement results for the judgement output expressions are displayed in one list.
Scn 0BMONB
All judges
Pressing SHIFT + Left/Right Keys
to change the brightness of the
background (dark « clear).
Freeze
Two-camera
Operation
144
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, switch between Camera 0 images and Camera 1 images using the Up/
Down Keys.
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
All Data
Measurement results for the data output expressions are displayed in one list.
Scn 0BMONB
All data
Pressing SHIFT + Left/Right Keys
to change the brightness of the
background (dark « clear).
Freeze
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, switch between Camera 0 images and Camera 1 images using the Up/
Down Keys.
Individual Judge, Individual Data
Calculation results for the each of the output expressions are displayed individually. Use the Up/Down Keys to switch to screens
for different expressions. If the SHIFT + ENT Keys are pressed
from this screen, the screen for changing conditions will be displayed, and the evaluation criteria can be changed while monitoring the calculation results. However, even if a trigger or a
STEP signal is input, measurement will not be performed while
this screen is displayed.
Scn 0BMONB
Individual judge
Judge0.
Switch the displayed item using the
Up/Down Keys.
Individual judge (0 to 15)
Individual data (0 to 7)
Expression:
R0.X-R1.X
Measurement:24.652
Freeze
-¯:Change
145
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, use the Up/
Down Keys to switch screens in the way shown below.
Example: When Judge 0 and Judge 1 are set
Judge 0
/
Judge 1
Camera 0 images
/
Judge 0
/
Camera 1 images
Judge 1
I/O Monitor
The contents of input made from external devices to the F150
and the contents of output made from the F150 to external devices can be displayed. (The contents of output are only possible
in Run mode.)
Only I/O transferred via the terminal blocks and RS-232C in Normal communications mode can be displayed. It is not possible to
display I/O transferred via CompoBus/D or RS-232C in Host Link
communications mode.
Scn 0 B MON B
I/O monitor
NG
67 ms
[SI] M
[SO] ER
[SI] M
[SO] 259, 810, 281, 222
[DI] 01000100
[DO] 1001100001110010
RS-232C (Normal) I/O character strings are displayed in
their original format. When a measurement is performed, the display scrolls upwards. A maximum of 4
lines can be displayed. (The bottom line is for the most
recent measurement.)
SI: Input
SO: Output
Freeze
Two-camera
Operation
146
Press the SHIFT + Left/Right Keys to
change the brightness of the background
(dark « clear).
I/O for the terminal blocks is displayed
in binary (0: OFF; 1: ON).
Two lines are always displayed.
DI: Input
DO: Output
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, switch between Camera 0 images and Camera 1 images using the Up/
Down Keys.
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
Cyclic Monitoring
Region, Judge, Data, and All are sets of several display items
that can each be displayed cyclically using the Up/Down Keys.
By using this function, it is not necessary to press the SHIFT +
ESC Keys and change the settings in Display settings. The
combinations and the order in which they are displayed are
shown below.
[Judge]
[Data]
All judges
All data
/
/
Individual judge (Judge 0)
Individual data (Data 0)
Individual judge (Judge 15)
Individual data (Data 7)
/
/
147
Section 4-1
Confirming Correct Operation
[Region]
All results of regions
[All]
All results of regions
/
All positions of regions
/
All positions of regions
/
Position compensation (region 0)
/
Position compensation (region 0)
/
Position compensation (region 1)
/
Position compensation (region 1)
/
Position compensation (Distance)
/
Position compensation (Distance)
/
Position compensation (region 10)
/
Position compensation (region 10)
/
Position compensation (region 11)
/
Position compensation (region 11)
/
Position compensation (Distance)
/
Position compensation (Distance)
/
/
Individual (region 0)
Individual (region 0)
Individual (region 15)
Individual (region 15)
/
All judges
/
Individual judge (Judge 0)
Individual judge (Judge 15)
All data
/
Individual data (Data 0)
/
Individual data (Data 7)
148
Section 4-2
Run Mode
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, the screens
for Camera 0 and Camera 1 are displayed in order.
Example: [Judge]
All judges
Camera 0
/
All judges
Camera 1
/
Individual judge (Judge 0)
Camera 0
Individual judge (Judge 15)
/
Individual judge (Judge 0)
Camera 1
Individual judge (Judge 15)
4-2
Run Mode
4-2-1
Entering Run Mode
Use Run mode to perform actual measurements.
Note The key allocations for the Console Keys can be changed. In the
following explanation, it is assumed that the key allocations are
at the default settings. If they are not, adapt the procedure
accordingly. ®p. 167
149
Section 4-2
Run Mode
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to MON and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
Scn 0 B MON B
OK
219 ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Select RUN.
Freeze
2 Select RUN to enter Run mode.
Scn 0 B RUN B
---
---ms
Freeze
4-2-2
Performing Measurement
Use the following procedure to execute measurement according
to the conditions set for the scene currently displayed.
Procedure
150
Press the TRIG Key on the Console or input the measurement
command from an external device.
Measurement will be executed and the measurement results will
be displayed on the screen and output to external devices. Apart
Section 4-2
Run Mode
from measurement commands, it is also possible to input various other commands form external devices.
Scn 0 B RUN B
OK
67 ms
Measurement Time
(The measurement time for freeze
display is shown here. The time for
through display is approx. 100 ms
longer than that for freeze display.)
Overall Judgement
(NG if there is an NG in one or
more measurement regions or
output expressions.)
Freeze
Press the SHIFT Key together with the Up/Down
Keys to switch display image. ®p. 164
Input Commands
Via the Terminal Block ®p 185
Via the RS-232C Port, Normal Communications ®p 203
Via the RS-232C Port, Host Link Communications ®p 239
Via CompoBus/D ®p 276
Output Formats
Via the Terminal Block ®p 186
Via the RS-232C Port, Normal Communications ®p 205
Via the RS-232C Port, Host Link Communications ®p 260
Via CompoBus/D ®p 299
Note
1. Storing Measured Images to Memory
Up to 23 screens can be stored to memory. Once 23 screens
have been stored, the existing screens will be overwritten in
order starting with the oldest.
To store measured images to memory, go to Display settings by pressing the SHIFT + ESC Keys, and make the appropriate settings for Image storage. To store NG images
only, select Only NG, and to store images regardless of the
judgement result, select All. ®p. 160
2. Repeating Measurement for Images in Memory
Measurement can be repeated for images stored to
memory.
Display the desired memory image using the SHIFT + Up/
151
Run Mode
Section 4-2
Down Keys and press SHIFT + TRIG Keys to execute measurement. Measurement can also be repeated for freeze
images without re-inputting the image using the SHIFT +
TRIG Keys. This feature can be used after evaluation criteria have been changed to check that the new criteria are appropriate.
3. Displaying Measurement Results
To display measurement results on the screen, go to Display settings by pressing the SHIFT + ESC Keys. For further details, refer to the section on Monitor mode.®p 140
! Caution The lighting will become progressively darker if used for long pe-
riods. Make periodic adjustments to the evaluation criteria.
The lighting will lose approximately 20% illumination after
1,500 hours of use.
152
SECTION 5
System Settings
This section explains how to set conditions related to the system environment.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
Entering System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Result Output Destinations . . . . . . . . .
Two-camera Unit and Intelligent Light Source . . . . .
Measurement Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Measured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
157
158
160
162
5-5-1
5-5-2
5-5-3
Image Storage Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Stored Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
164
166
Changing Console Key Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Startup Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Output Method for Error Terminal . . . . . .
Checking the Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
172
174
175
153
Section 5-1
Entering System Mode
5-1
Entering System Mode
To set conditions related to the system environment it is necessary to enter System mode.
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
2 Move the cursor to MON and press the ENT Key.
Scn 0 B MON B
---
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Freeze
154
Section 5-2
Measurement Result Output Destinations
3 Select SYS.
The system menu will be displayed.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
5-2
Measurement Result Output Destinations
The F150 can output judgements and data for measured objects
to an external device. Use the following procedure to select the
destination for judgment output and data output.
Output item
Output destination
F150-C10E-3-DRT
F150-C10E-3,
F150-C15E-3
Judgement
CompoBus/D (fixed)
Terminal block (fixed)
Data
CompoBus/D* or
RS-232C
RS-232C* or terminal
block
Default settings are indicated with an asterisk.
Note Set the contents for the outputs in Expression. ® p. 121
155
Two-camera Unit and Intelligent Light Source
Section 5-3
Procedure
1 Go to SYS/Output.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
2 Select the output destinations.
F150-C10E-3-DRT
F150-C10E-3, F150-C15E-3
3 Select End to enter the settings and to exit this screen.
5-3
Two-camera Unit and Intelligent Light
Source
If a Two-camera Unit or an Intelligent Light Source are used,
make the settings shown below to change the menu configuration for System mode. Refer to the following page for details of
the menu configuration when a Two-camera Unit is connected to
the F150: ® p. 13
Note
156
1. If, after setting measurement conditions for operation with
just one Camera, a Two-camera Unit is connected and the
settings given here are made, the original settings will be
made automatically for Camera 0.
Two-camera Unit and Intelligent Light Source
Section 5-3
2. There are DIP switches on the Intelligent Light Sources for
setting the unit number. Set the unit number for the Intelligent Light Source connected to Camera 0 to 0 and set the
unit number for the Intelligent Light Source connected to
Camera 1 to 1. ® p. 43
Procedure
1 Enter System mode and select Device settings.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
2 Make the required settings for the Two-camera Unit or the
Intelligent Light Source.
Camera unit
F150-A20 B
Intelligent lighting 0
F150-LTC20 B
Intelligent lighting 1
F150-LTC20 B
:
:
:
The model number of the
Intelligent Light Source is
given on the product itself.
End
3 Select End to enter the settings.
157
Section 5-4
Measurement Screen Settings
5-4
Measurement Screen Settings
Set the items below to determine the information displayed in
Run mode and Monitor mode.
Item
Display image
Details
Select the display status for the screen.
Freeze (default
setting)
Displays a still image (updated each time a
measurement is performed.) When inspecting
moving objects, select “freeze.”
Through
Displays the image currently being taken by the
Camera. If measurement is performed in through
state, there is a delay of approx. 100 ms between
the time the measurement command is input and
the time image input processing starts. Therefore,
the time of measurement will be delayed by the
same amount. This delay is included in the
measurement time displayed in Monitor mode
and Run mode.
Display result
Select the data displayed for measurement results.
For details refer to the section on Monitor mode. ® p. 140
Image storage
Select the conditions for storage of measured images.
158
None (default
setting)
Nothing stored.
Only NG
Only images with NG judgements are stored.
(However, the most recent image is stored
regardless of the judgement.)
All
All images are stored regardless of the
judgement.
Section 5-4
Measurement Screen Settings
Item
Coordinate
calculation
Details
Select the coordinates for output.
Example:
Measured image
(before position
compensation)
Reference position
The coordinates of the
center of gravity of this
mark are obtained.
This corner is
used as the
model for position
compensation.
Before scroll
(default setting)
In the above example,
the image is displaced
up and to the left.
Image after position
compensation
Part of screen outside
image is black.
Output made using the
coordinate values before
position displacement
compensation.
(The screen selected in
Display image is
displayed.)
After scroll
Output made using the
coordinate values after
position displacement
compensation.
(The screen selected in
Display image is
displayed.)
159
Storing Measured Images
Section 5-5
Procedure
1 Go to SYS/Display.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
2 Set the conditions.
3 Select End to enter the settings and to exit this screen.
5-5
Storing Measured Images
The F150 can store up to 23 measured images (for all 16 scenes
together). It is possible to set the F150 to only store images which
resulted in NG judgements, or to store all images regardless of
the measurement result.
5-5-1
Image Storage Function
Measured images that correspond to the set conditions are
stored in the order “last 1,” “last 2” and so on. Once 23 screens
160
Section 5-5
Storing Measured Images
have been stored, the existing screens will be overwritten in
order starting with the oldest.
Production line
3 objects before
OK product
2 objects before
NG product
1 object before
NG product
Object just
inspected
OK product
Storage image
When conditions
for image storage
set to “only NG”
When conditions for
image storage
set to “All”
Note
Last 3
Last 1
Last
Last 2
Last 1
Last
1. Stored images are cleared when the power is turned OFF.
Save the images by backing them up to a personal computer. ® p. 176
2. It is possible to set the Console Keys allocations so that
memory images can be cleared by simply pressing one
key. ® p. 167
161
Section 5-5
Storing Measured Images
5-5-2
Memory Storage Conditions
Procedure
1 Enter System mode and select Display.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
2 Set Image storage as desired.
Display settings
Display image
Display results
:
:
Image storage
Coordinate calc
:
:
End
162
Freeze B
None B
None
All B
None
Before
Onlyscroll
NG B
All
Section 5-5
Storing Measured Images
3 Select End to enter the settings.
Display settings
Display image
Display results
:
:
Image storage
Coordinate calc
:
:
Freeze B
None B
All B
Before scroll B
End
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, the images
for both Camera 0 and Camera 1 are stored with each measurement.
Last2 0 (Mem3)
Image for Camera 0
stored 2 measurements
before.
Last2 1 (Mem4)
Image for Camera 1
stored 2 measurements
before.
163
Section 5-5
Storing Measured Images
5-5-3
Displaying Stored Images
By displaying a stored image on the screen, the reason for a previous NG judgement can be checked. Also, measurement can
be re-performed on the stored image with different evaluation criteria. The message in the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the type of image being displayed.
Refer to the following table.
Display
Freeze
Through
_(Mem j)
164
Details
The image that has just been measured is displayed. Whether
this image is a freeze image or a through image depends on the
settings in SYS/Display.
A previously stored image is displayed. Up to 24 (Mem 0 to 23)
images are stored in accordance with the conditions for storage
of measured images (only NG or All). When the image is to be
backed up to a personal computer, specify a memory number in
j.
Last(Mem j)
The measured image most recently stored is displayed. If this
image had an NG judgement, “Last” will be in reverse
black/white.
Last * (Mem j)
The * after “Last” contains the number indicating how many
screens previously the image was stored. Up to 23 previous
images can be displayed. “Last *” will be displayed in reverse
black/white for NG images.
...(Mem j)
Either no image is stored in memory, or an image other than a
measurement image (an image loaded from a personal
computer) is displayed.
Section 5-5
Storing Measured Images
Example
Second most recently stored NG image.
Memory number for the
currently displayed image.
Switching Method
In Monitor mode, Run mode, or from SET/Position compensation or SET/Measurement region, press the SHIFT + Up/
Down Keys to switch between images.
Last * (Mem j)
SHIFT +
Last 2 (Mem j)
SHIFT +
Last 1 (Mem j)
SHIFT +
Last (Mem j)
(see note 1)
SHIFT +
Freeze or Through
SHIFT +
Last 23 (Mem j)
(see note 2)
SHIFT +
Last 22 (Mem j)
165
Storing Measured Images
Note
Section 5-5
1. Under the following conditions, the images for “Last (Mem
j)” and “Freeze” will be the same.
Display image: Set to freeze.
Image storage: Set to all.
or
Display image: Set to freeze.
Image storage: Set to only NG.
Last measurement was NG.
2. If the following conditions hold, the number of stored images
will not exceed 22.
Image memory: Set to only NG
Last measurement was OK.
Two-camera
Operation
166
If the Two-camera Unit is used and the camera mode is Twocamera Switching mode, in Monitor mode or Run mode the
Changing Console Key Allocations
Section 5-6
memory images for the Camera currently displayed are displayed in order.
When a Camera 0 image is displayed:
Last 1 0 (Mem 5)
SHIFT +
Last 0 (Mem 3)
SHIFT +
Freeze or through image for Camera 0
When a Camera 1 image is displayed:
Last 1 1 (Mem 6)
SHIFT +
Last 1 (Mem 4)
SHIFT +
Freeze or through image for Camera 1
5-6
Changing Console Key Allocations
It is possible to change the allocations for Console Key operations. The set allocations are only enabled in Monitor mode or
Run mode.
167
Section 5-6
Changing Console Key Allocations
Item
Function
None
Nothing allocated
Display settings
Displays the SYS/Display settings screen
Previous image
Displays the previous memory image
Next image
Displays the next memory image
Change background
Changes the brightness of the background (dark « clear)
for screens displaying lists of results
(Can only be used for All results of regions, All judges,
All data, and I/O monitor.)
Judge conditions
Displays the screen for setting evaluation criteria
Previous scene
Displays the previous scene
Next scene
Displays the next scene
I/O monitor
Displays the I/O Monitor Screen
Clear images
(See note 1.)
Displays a confirmation message from which all stored
images can be cleared
Erase characters
(See note 2.)
Displays the menu for character display settings
Save
(See note 3.)
Displays a confirmation message for saving to flash
memory
Note
1. Clearing Stored Images
A message confirming whether all stored images are to be
cleared is displayed. Images stored in memory are cleared
when power is turned OFF. By allocating this function to a
Console Key, stored images can be cleared without turning
power OFF.
All stored images
will be cleared.
Execute
Cancel
2. Erasing Characters
To prevent scorching of the monitor screen, it is possible to
delete screen characters.
Character disp.
End
168
: ON B
Section 5-6
Changing Console Key Allocations
3. Save
Save settings by making a backup copy of data to flash
memory before turning power OFF.
Setting data will be saved.
Execute
Cancel
The default settings are shown below.
ESC
SFT+ENT
SFT+ESC
SFT+¬
SFT+®
SFT+SFT+¯
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
None B
Judge conditions B
Display settings B
Change background B
Change background B
Previous image B
Next image B
End
Procedure
1 Enter System mode and select Set key operation.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
169
Section 5-7
Setting Startup Conditions
2 Change the key allocations as desired.
Set key operation
ESC
SFT+ENT
SFT+ESC
SFT+¬
SFT+®
SFT+SFT+¯
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
None B
Judge conditions B
Display settings B
Change background B
Change background B
Previous image B
Next image B
End
3 Select End to enter the settings.
5-7
Setting Startup Conditions
Use the following procedure to set the startup scene and mode
that will be used when the power is turned ON.
If the F150 is set to start in Run mode for the scene where the
desired measurement conditions are registered, measurement
of objects can be started by simply turning the power ON.
The default setting is for scene 0 and Monitor mode.
The following example illustrates operation when the startup
scene is set to 1 and the startup mode is set to Run.
The next time the power is turned
ON, the F150 will start at scene 1
and in Run mode.
170
Setting Startup Conditions
Section 5-7
Procedure
1 Go to SYS/Startup mode.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
2 Select the startup scene number and the startup mode.
3 Select End to enter the settings and to exit this screen.
171
Section 5-8
Selecting Output Method for Error Terminal
5-8
Selecting Output Method for Error
Terminal
During processing (i.e.: while BUSY terminal is ON), even if the
STEP terminal is turned ON, the F150 will not perform measurement. It is possible to set the ERR terminal so that it turns ON to
indicate to an external device that input to the STEP terminal
could not be received.
Selection
Details
ERR ON
(default
setting)
During processing (i.e.: BUSY terminal ON), if the
STEP terminal turns ON, the ERR terminal will be
turned ON and measurement will not be performed.
The next time a STEP signal is input with the BUSY
terminal OFF, the ERR terminal will go OFF.
OFF
During processing (i.e.: BUSY terminal ON), if the
STEP terminal turns ON, the ERR terminal will not
come ON. Measurement will not be performed.
Procedure
1 Go to SYS/Error method.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
172
Checking the Software Version
Section 5-9
2 Select the desired setting.
3 Select End to enter the setting and to exit this screen.
5-9
Checking the Software Version
Use the following procedure to check the Vision Sensor model
and the software system version.
Procedure
1 Go to SYS/Version.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
173
Section 5-9
Checking the Software Version
2 Select OK to exit this screen.
Model number is displayed.
F150-C10E-3
Ver.3.00 XXXX/XX/XX
174
XX:XX
Software version and date
of creation are displayed.
SECTION 6
Backing Up Data
This section explains how to make backup copies of data to flash memory or a computer.
When the power to the F150 is turned OFF, all data settings are cleared. The F150 loads data
saved to flash memory at startup. Therefore, when settings are changed, in order not to lose
these settings, be sure to save them to flash memory.
6-1
6-2
Saving/Loading System and Scene Data . . . . . . . . . .
Saving to Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
181
175
Section 6-1
Saving/Loading System and Scene Data
6-1
Saving/Loading System and Scene Data
The system and scene data can be backed up on a computer.
The same data can also be loaded from a computer to the F150.
Saving and loading data enables using the same data on other
F150 Controllers.
It is recommended that data is backed up in case data is lost or
the F150 malfunctions.
Data
Contents
System data
Settings under SYS.
Scene data
Settings under SET.
System data and
scene data
Both the system data and scene data (0 to
15) together.
Image data
Memory images in BMP format. This is the
basic image format for Windows and so the
images can be displayed on a personal
computer.
Note Data is saved from the F150 to a computer, and loaded to the
F150 from a computer.
! Caution Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal while a mes-
sage is being displayed in any save or load operations. Data in
memory will be destroyed, and the F150 may not operate correctly the next time it is started.
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
176
Section 6-1
Saving/Loading System and Scene Data
2 Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT Key.
Scn 0 B MON B
---
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Freeze
3 Select TOOL.
4 Select the kind of data along with the operation (load or
save).
Load system data
Save system data
Load scene data
Save scene data
Load sys+scn data
Save sys+scn data
Load image data
Save image data
5 For scene data or image data, select the corresponding
number.
Scene number (0 to 15)
Image data (Mem 0 to 23)
6 A confirmation message will be displayed. Select Execute.
As an example, when saving system data the following
message will be displayed:
177
Section 6-1
Saving/Loading System and Scene Data
Sample Operation for Personal Computer
As an example, this section explains how to perform data transfers using HyperTerminal on Windows 95/98 or Windows NT 4.0.
It is assumed that an RS-232C cable is connected to COM1 on
the personal computer. If the COM number is different, adapt the
procedure accordingly. If different communications software is to
be used, refer to the relevant manual for that software. Data communications are performed according to Xmodem (-CRC or SUM) protocol.
! Caution Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal while a mes-
sage is being displayed in any save or load operations. Data in
memory will be destroyed, and the F150 may not operate correctly the next time it is started.
Saving Data to the Computer
1 Connect the COM 1 port on the computer and the F150 using an RS-232C cable.
2 Make the F150 communications settings.
The default communications settings are as shown in the
following table. These settings can normally be used.
Item
Setting
Baud rate
38,400 bps
Data length
8 (bits)
Parity bits
None
Stop bits
1 (bit)
Delimiter
CR
3 Start the HyperTerminal program on the computer and
make the following communications settings.
The same communications settings must be used on both
the F150 and the modem on the computer.
Setting
Item
Speed
38,400 bps
Data bits
8 (bits)
Parity bits
None
Stop bits
1 (bit)
Flow control
None (Xmodem protocol is used.)
4 Execute the saving operation from the F150.
The data transfer screen will be displayed.
178
Saving to Flash Memory
Section 6-2
5 Select Transfer/Receive File from the HyperTerminal
menu.
6 Specify where the file is to be saved and set the protocol to
Xmodem.
7 Select Receive. The data will be transferred from the F150
to the computer.
The F150 will generate a timeout error if no response is received from the external device within 30 seconds. An error
message will be displayed, and the error terminal will turn
ON.
Loading Data from the Computer
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in the above procedure to connect the
F150 and the computer.
2 Select Transfer/Send File from the HyperTerminal menu.
3 Select the file to be sent and set the protocol to Xmodem.
4 Select Send.
The data transfer screen will be displayed.
5 Execute the loading operation from the F150.
The F150 will generate a timeout error if no response is received from the external device within 30 seconds. An error
message will be displayed, and the error terminal will turn
ON.
6-2
Saving to Flash Memory
Use the following memory to save set data to flash memory.
Flash memory data is loaded each time the F150 is started up.
Therefore, when settings have been changed, be sure to save to
flash memory before turning the power OFF. If the power is
turned OFF without saving, all of the setting changes will be lost.
179
Section 6-2
Saving to Flash Memory
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
2 Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT Key.
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
3 Select SAVE.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
4 Select Execute.
When saving has been completed, the screen for step 1 will
be returned.
! Caution Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal while a mes-
sage is being displayed in any save or load operations. Data in
memory will be destroyed, and the F150 may not operate correctly the next time it is started.
180
SECTION 7
Terminal Block
This section describes the communications settings and I/O formats for communications
with external devices via the terminal blocks.
7-1
7-2
7-3
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
187
7-2-1
7-2-2
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
188
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing . . . . . . . . . . .
189
7-3-1
7-3-2
189
193
No Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Handshaking (F150-C10E-3, F150-C15E-3)
181
Section 7-1
Communications Settings
7-1
Communications Settings
Procedures for setting communications specifications are given
below. Set the F150 to the same settings as external devices.
The following communications settings are required.
Item
Description
ON state
Handshaking
(F150-C10E-3,
F150-C15E-3)
Select whether to turn ON the OR and DO 0 to
DO 15 terminals for OK or NG. The default is ON
for NG.
OFF
Used to output the measurement result without
synchronizing with the external device.
This is the default setting.
ON
Used to output the measurement result while
synchronizing with the external device.
Output period
Set the output period for the measurement result.
(Only effective without
handshaking)
Set a value between 2.0 and 10,000.0 ms that is
greater than the Gate ON delay + Gate ON time,
and less than the measurement interval. If this
period is longer than the measurement interval,
the output timing will fall behind as the
measurements are repeated.
Gate ON delay
Set the time from when the result is output to the
terminal block to when the GATE signal is turned
ON.
The default setting is 10.0 ms.
This time is used to wait until the data output
becomes stable. Set a time between 1.0 and
1,000 ms that is longer than the delay time for
the external device.
The default setting is 1.0 ms.
Gate ON time
Set the time for which the GATE signal is ON.
(Only effective without
handshaking)
Set a value between 1.0 and 1,000 ms that will
allow the external device to read the
measurement result.
Timeout (F150-C10E-3,
F150-C15E-3)
A timeout error will occur if there is no response
from the external device within the set time.
(Only effective with
handshaking)
Set a value between 0.5 and 120.0 s.
The default setting is 5.0 ms.
182
The default setting is 10.0 s.
Section 7-1
Communications Settings
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
2 Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT key.
Scn 0 B MON B
---
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Freeze
3 Select SYS.
183
Section 7-1
Communications Settings
4 Select Communications.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
5 Select Terminal block.
System settings
Communications
Output RS-232C
Device settings
Normal
Display Host link
Set key operation
Terminal block
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
6 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
F150-C10E-3, F150-C15E-3
184
F150-C10E-3-DRT
Section 7-2
I/O Formats
7 Select End to exit this screen and enter the settings.
7-2
I/O Formats
The terminal blocks can be used to input and output various signals, e.g., to input a measurement trigger from a photoelectric or
other sensor and to output the overall judgement to a Programmable Controller or other external device.
7-2-1
Inputs
The following commands can be input in Monitor mode or Run
mode.
STEP Terminal
One measurement will be performed when the STEP terminal
turns ON.
DI0 to DI7 Terminals (F150-C10E-3, F150-C15E-3)
The following commands can be input.
To use these inputs, turn ON DI7 for 1 ms or more after setting the
status of the DI0 to DI6 inputs.
The F150-C10E-3-DRT does not have any DI inputs and therefore does not support the following commands.
DI inputs
Command
Execute
7
Function
Command
6
5
4
Operand
3
2
1
0
0
1
*
Switching
scenes
1
0
1
0
Scene No.
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
Region number
1
1
0
0
0
Example
Model
registration
Example
*
1
Continuous
measurement
0
1
*
1
1
0
*
Measurement is
performed continually
during command input.
Switches the scene.
0
Switches to scene 2.
Re-registers the model
based on the
measurement image
input immediately
before.
(This command is only
valid if a region for
gray search or precise
search has been
specified. If other
regions have been
specified this
command will be
ignored.)
0
Registers the model
for region 6.
185
Section 7-2
I/O Formats
0: OFF
1: ON
*: Status is not read by F150, i.e., the status does not matter.
7-2-2
Outputs
Whenever a measurement is performed, the judgement is output.
The data is only output in Run mode. There is no output to the
terminals in Monitor mode.
The F150 can be set to turn ON terminals for either OK or NG
results. The default is for output to be ON for NG results.
® p 182
! Caution After measurement is performed in Run mode, the data output to
the OR terminal and DO terminal will be held until the next time
measurement is performed in Run mode. The output status will
be held even if the mode is changed.
! Caution The initial status of the output terminals is OFF. The terminals,
however, may turn ON for approximately 0.5 s when the power is
turned ON. Be sure to allow for this when reading the status at an
external device.
OR Terminal
The overall judgement is output to the OR terminal. This overall
judgement will be NG if there is one or more NG judgements for
the set measurement regions or output expressions.
DO0 to DO15 Terminals (F150-C10E-3, F150-C15E-3)
Judgement
Output
Judgement outputs 0 to 15 set in Expression/Judge will be output from terminals DO0 to DO15.
Data Output
If Terminal block is selected as the data output destination in
SYS/Output, before judgement results are output, the results of
the expressions set for data outputs 0 to 7 in Expression/Data
will be output from the terminal blocks.
186
Section 7-3
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing
Refer to the following page for details on how to select the output
destination: ® p. 155
STEP input
Measurement
Data 0
Data 1
Judgement
Block output of results for expressions
set in Expressions/Data.
Only integral values are output. Values with digits after the decimal point are rounded to the nearest integer.
Values can be output in the range --32768 to 32767.
Values less than --32768 are output as --32768.
Values greater than 32767 are output as 32767.
Data is output in two’s complement binary format.
! Caution After measurement is performed in Run mode, the data output to
the OR terminal and DO terminal will be held until the next time
measurement is performed in Run mode. The output status will
be held even if the mode is changed.
! Caution The initial status of the output terminals is OFF. The terminals,
however, may turn ON for approximately 0.5 s when the power is
turned ON. Be sure to allow for this when reading the status at an
external device.
7-3
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing
The following explains the operation of the terminal signals
based on the various communications settings that are possible.
Use the information provided here to determine which settings to
make.
7-3-1
No Handshaking
The F150 outputs the measurement results without synchronization with the external device. Read the measurement results
at the external device while the GATE terminal is ON.
187
Section 7-3
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing
Using the STEP Terminal as a Measurement Trigger
Judgement and Data Output Destinations Both Set to Terminal Block
Enter Run mode
Leave Run mode
STEP input
Measurement
Overall judgement
Data 0
Data 1
Judgement
RisingOutput
time time
Output period
Note: Only the results of expressions set
in Expression/Data and Expression/Judge are output.
Judgement Output Destination Set to Terminal Block,
Data Output Destination Set to RS-232C
Only judgement results are output via the terminal block.
Enter Run mode
STEP input
Leave Run mode
STEP input
Measurement
Measurement
Overall
judgement
Judgement
Rising Output
time time
Output period
188
STEP input STEP input
Measurement
Measurement
Section 7-3
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing
Output Terminals
Function
Terminal
RUN
Turns ON during Run mode.
BUSY
Shows that the F150 is reading an image, changing a scene, etc.
Do not input the next command while the BUSY terminal is ON. Otherwise,
commands may not be properly executed.
OR
Outputs the overall judgements. (Can be set to turn ON for either OK or NG
judgement.)
The overall result will be NG if there is one or more NG judgements for the
measurement regions or output expressions.
DO
Outputs the results of the expressions set in Expression/Judge and
Expression/Data and the judgement results for the output expressions.
(Can be set to turn ON for either OK or NG judgement.)
Note There are no DO terminals for the F150-C10E-3-DRT.
GATE
Used to time the reading of the measurement result at the external device.
The time that GATE is turned ON can be set as required for the external
device to correctly read the measurement result.
Make the output time shorter than the duration of the measurement (STEP
input). If the period is longer, the output timing will fall behind as
measurements are repeated.
Note If the GATE terminal control output is set to user output in the communications specifications setting menu for CompoBus/D, the GATE terminal cannot be used to control timing.
Input Terminals
Terminal
STEP
Function
Inputs a measurement trigger from a photoelectric sensor or other external
device.
One measurement will be taken on the rising edge of the STEP signal. Turn
ON the STEP for at least 0.5 ms.
Note If a STEP signal is input while the BUSY terminal is ON, the ERR
terminal will come ON. ® p. 172
Performing Continuous Measurements (F150-C10E-3,
F150-C15E-3)
Set the output period so that the total output time is less than the
measurement time. If the total output time is more than the mea-
189
Section 7-3
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing
surement time, as measurement is repeated, the output timing
will lag behind.
Enter Run mode
Leave Run mode
DI0 to DI6
Measurement
Measurement
Measurement
Overall judgement
Data 0
Rising time
Data 1
Judgement
Data 0 Data 1
Output time
Output period
Total output time =
Output period ´
No. of items of output data
The function of the output terminals is the same as when inputting a measurement trigger using the STEP terminal, as described previously.
Output
Terminals
Input Terminals
Function
Terminal
DI 0 to
DI 3
OFF
DI4
ON
DI5 to
DI6
OFF
DI7
Execution trigger.
Leave at least 1 ms after setting DI 0 to 6 before turning DI 7 ON. During
command execution, the BUSY terminal will turn ON. During execution of
continuous measurement, the BUSY terminal will stay ON.
190
Section 7-3
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing
7-3-2
Using Handshaking (F150-C10E-3, F150-C15E-3)
Handshaking can be used to synchronize the F150 with an external device to output measurement results. This is an effective
way to output several measurement results in order, allowing
data to be properly transferred.
Using the STEP Terminal as a Measurement Trigger
Judgement and Data Output Destinations Both Set to Terminal Block
Enter Run mode
Leave Run mode
STEP input
Measurement
Overall judgement (output when measurement is completed
regardless of the the status of the DSA terminal.)
Data 0
Data 1
Judgement
Rising time
Timeout time
Timeout time
A timeout error will occur if
DSA does not turn ON within the set time after measurement is completed.
A timeout error will occur if DSA
does not turn OFF within the set
time after GATE turns ON.
Note: Only the results of expressions set in Expression/Data and Expression/Judge
are output.
The function of all terminals except the DSA terminal is the same
as for communications without handshaking. The DSA terminal
is only used with handshaking.
191
Section 7-3
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing
Input Terminal
Terminal
DSA
Function
Requests the next data output from the external
device. The F150 will not output data until this
terminal is turned ON.
Turn ON the DSA terminal when the external device
is ready to receive data and the F150 has finished
measurement.
The BUSY terminal is ON during measurement, i.e.,
measurement will be completed when the BUSY
terminal turns OFF. Use the BUSY signal to time
reading measurement results.
Note If a STEP signal is input while the BUSY terminal is ON, the ERR
terminal will come ON. ® p. 172
Scene Changing and Model Registration (F150-C10E-3,
F150-C15E-3)
Enter Run mode
Leave Run mode
DI0 to 6
Command executed
Output Terminals
Terminal
RUN
BUSY
Function
Turns ON during Run mode.
Shows that the F150 is reading an image, changing a scene, etc.
Do not input the next command while the BUSY terminal is ON. Otherwise,
commands may not be properly executed.
192
Section 7-3
Terminal Signal Operation and Timing
Input Terminals
Scene Changing
Terminal
Function
DI 0 to
DI 3
Set the scene number (0 to 15).
DI4
OFF
DI5
ON
DI6
OFF
DI7
Execution trigger.
Leave at least 1 ms after setting DI 0 to 6 before turning DI 7 ON. During
command execution, the BUSY terminal will turn ON. After confirming that
the BUSY terminal has turned ON, turn OFF DI 7 before turning OFF DI 0 to
6.
Model Registration
Function
Terminal
DI 0 to
DI 3
Set the region number (0 to 15).
DI4
OFF
DI5
OFF
DI6
ON
DI7
Execution trigger.
Leave at least 1 ms after setting DI 0 to 6 before turning DI 7 ON. During
command execution, the BUSY terminal will turn ON. After confirming that
the BUSY terminal has turned ON, turn OFF DI 7 before turning OFF DI 0 to
6.
193
SECTION 8
RS-232C Normal Settings
This section describes the communications settings for the RS-232C port when communications are set for Normal mode.
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
8-1-1
Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
8-1-2
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
207
207
8-4-1
DATASAVE: Data Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
8-4-2
DISPIMG: Display Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
8-4-3
EXP: Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
8-4-4
EXPPARA (EP): Expression Parameter . . . . . . . .
209
8-4-5
IMGLOAD: Image Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
8-4-6
IMGSAVE: Image Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
8-4-7
LITPARA: Light Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
8-4-8
MEASDATA (MD): Measure Data . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
8-4-9
MEASPARA (MP): Measure Parameter . . . . . . . .
216
8-4-10
MEASURE: Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
8-4-11
MENUKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
8-4-12
MODELSET: Model Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
8-4-13
POSIDATA (PD): Position Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
8-4-14
POSIPARA (PP): Position Parameter . . . . . . . . . .
225
8-4-15
RESET: Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226
8-4-16
SCENE: Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
8-4-17
SCNLOAD: Scene Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
8-4-18
SCNSAVE: Scene Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
8-4-19
SYSLOAD: System Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
8-4-20
SYSSAVE: System Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
8-4-21
VERGET: Version Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
Measurement Results Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
195
Section 8-1
Communications Settings
8-1
Communications Settings
8-1-1
Flowcharts
If the Normal communications mode is selected, data can be output in non-procedural format to an external device via the
RS-232C port.
Set Mode
Command inputs cannot be received.
Monitor
Mode
Command inputs can be received, but measurement results are
not output to external devices. Only the execution result itself
(i.e.: OK or ER) is output. If a command to read a set value is
input, that value will be output.
Run Mode
Both command input and measurement result output are supported.
Note The output of data after measurement is performed in Run mode
will continue until all of the data has been output, even if the mode
is changed. Data output will not be interrupted.
Measurement Commands
I/O via RS-232C Port
F150
Computer
Input command
Perform measurement
*The BUSY terminal turns ON while a
measurements are being performed.
Output result
Receive result
Note When RC/CS or Xon/off flow control is selected, if a response is
not received from the computer within a set time, the F150 will
conclude that there is a disconnection or that the computer is not
operating normally, and will generate a timeout error. An error
message will be displayed and the error terminal will turn ON.
196
Section 8-1
Communications Settings
Inputting Measurement Trigger from STEP Terminal
F150
Computer
STEP
Perform measurement
*The BUSY terminal is ON while measurements are being performed.
Output result
Receive result
Note When RC/CS or Xon/off flow control is selected, if a response is
not received from the computer within a set time, the F150 will
conclude that there is a disconnection or that the computer is not
operating normally, and will generate a timeout error. An error
message will be displayed and the error terminal will turn ON.
197
Section 8-1
Communications Settings
Non-measurement Commands
The following timing chart shows the basic flow of command
execution.
F150
Computer
Input command
Execute command
*The BUSY terminal is ON while the
commands are being executed.
Output result
Receive result
Note When RC/CS or Xon/off flow control is selected, if a response is
not received from the computer within a set time, the F150 will
conclude that there is a disconnection or that the computer is not
operating normally, and will generate a timeout error. An error
message will be displayed and the error terminal will turn ON.
8-1-2
Communications Settings
Baud Rate and Communications Mode
The following explains how to set the baud rate, data length, and
other communications specifications.
The same communications settings must be used for both the
F150 and the external device.
198
Section 8-1
Communications Settings
Item
Setting
Use the same
settings on the
IBM
Programmable
Controller/AT or
compatible
computer.
Baud rate
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200,
38,400* (bps)
Data length
7, 8* (bits)
Parity bits
None*, even, odd
Stop bits
1*, 2 (bits)
Delimiter
CR*, LF, CR+LF
Mode
Normal*, Host Link, Menu. Select Normal.
Note The default settings are marked with asterisks.*
Save and Load Commands
Make the following settings when using commands for save or
load operations.
Setting
Item
Data length
8 bits
Parity bits
None
Stop bits
1 bit
Flow control
None
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
199
Section 8-1
Communications Settings
2 Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT Key.
Scn 0 B MON B
---
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Freeze
3 Select SYS.
4 Select Communications.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
200
Communications Settings
Section 8-1
5 Select RS-232C.
System settings
Communications
Output RS-232C
Device settings
Normal
Display Host link
Set key operation
Terminal block
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
6 Set the items.
7 Select End to enter the settings.
Flow Control Settings
Flow control allows communications to be performed while
checking the status of the external device. Timeout errors can be
set to occur when there is no response from the external device
after a set number of seconds.
An error message will appear on the screen if a timeout error has
occurred, and the error terminal will turn ON.
201
Section 8-1
Communications Settings
Item
Flow control
Setting
None*
No flow control.
RS/CS
The hardware performs flow
control.
Use a cable that connects
the RS and CS signals of the
F150 and external device.
Data is transferred when the
CS signal from the external
device is ON.
Xon/off
The software performs flow
control.
Data is transferred according
to the Xon/off codes from the
external device.
Timeout
Set the number of seconds (1 to 120 s)
before a timeout error occurs.
The default is 5 s.
Note The default settings are marked with asterisks.*
Procedure
1 Select Normal.
System settings
Communications
Output RS-232C
Device settings
Normal
Display Host link
Set key operation
Terminal block
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
202
Section 8-2
Command List
3 Select End to enter the settings and to exit this screen.
8-2
Command List
The following commands can be input from a computer or other
host device connected to the RS-232C port. Commands are
input in ASCII.
Ensure that the communications settings for the F150 and the
external device are the same.
Commands that Control Operation
The following commands are used to control F150 operation.
Function
Command
DISPIMG
MEASURE or
M
Page
Reads the memory number of the currently
displayed image.
205
Changes the displayed image.
206
Performs one measurement.
219
Performs one measurement on the
currently displayed image.
220
Starts continuous measurement.
220
Stops continuous measurement.
220
MENUKEY
Switches RS-232C input to menu
operation.
221
MODELSET
Registers the model.
221
RESET
Resets the F150.
224
SCENE
Reads the scene number of the currently
displayed scene.
225
Changes the scene.
225
203
Section 8-2
Command List
Commands that Read Measurement Results
The following commands read the results of the most recent
measurement.
Command
Function
Page
POSIDATA
(PD)
Reads the position compensation result or
the displacement value.
222
MEASDATA
(MD)
Reads the measurement result.
211
EXP
Reads the calculation result for output
expressions.
206
Commands that Save/Load Data
The following commands are used to make and retrieve backup
for data set at the F150.
Command
Function
Page
DATASAVE
Saves all data to flash memory.
205
SCNLOAD
Loads scene data from an external device.
225
SCNSAVE
Saves scene data to an external device.
226
SYSLOAD
Loads system data from an external
device.
226
SYSSAVE
Saves system data to an external device.
227
IMGLOAD
Loads image data from an external device.
208
IMGSAVE
Saves image data to an external device.
208
Commands that Read/Change Current Settings
The following commands are used to read or change settings
such as evaluation criteria. Operation can be controlled from the
host by changing parameters for settings at the F150.
Command
204
Setting
Page
POSIPARA
(PP)
Reads/sets parameters for position
compensation regions.
223
MEASPARA
(MP)
Reads/sets parameters for measurement
regions.
214
EXPPARA
(EP)
Reads/sets evaluation criteria for
judgement output expressions.
207
LITPARA
Reads/sets light level of Intelligent Light
Source.
209
VERGET
Reads version information for the system.
227
Section 8-4
Input Commands
8-3
Input Format
The commands are input in ASCII. Commands can be made in
either upper-case letters or lower-case letters.
a)
b)
c)
MEASDATA <Measurement_region_number> <Parameter> delimiter
a) Variables are indicated in italics in pointed brackets< >.
Actual values must be input for the variables.
b) A space is required between each of the parameters
(but not before a delimiter).
c) A delimiter is required at the end of the command.
Note The delimiters have been omitted from the commands and responses in this manual except where
required for clarity. Be sure to allow for delimiters in
programming.
8-4
Input Commands
The commands are explained in alphabetical order.
8-4-1
DATASAVE: Data Save
DATASAVE is used to save all data to flash memory.
Input
DATASAVE
Output
Data correctly saved:
Data not correctly saved:
OK
ER
Note Do not turn OFF the power until a response has been received.
8-4-2
DISPIMG: Display Image
DISPIMG is used to read or change the memory number of the
currently displayed image.
Reading Memory Number of Currently Displayed Image
Input
DISPIMG
Output
Data correctly read:
Command not correct:
<Memory_number>
OK
ER
205
Section 8-4
Input Commands
When a through or freeze image is being displayed, the memory
number for the latest measurement image is output. If there is no
measurement image stored in memory, --1 will be output.
Example
DISPIMG
12
OK
Input:
Output:
The memory image number 12 is being displayed.
Changing Currently Displayed Image
Input
DISPIMG <Memory_number>
· Specify a memory number in the range --1 to 23. If --1 is specified, the display will change to a through or freeze image,
depending on the display settings. ® p. 158
Output
Command correctly executed:
OK
Command not correct:
ER
Example
DISPIMG 8
Input:
Memory image number 8 is displayed.
Output: OK
8-4-3
EXP: Expression
EXP is used to read the results of output expressions.
Input
EXP <Output_type> <Output_number>
· Specify the following values for output type and output number:
Output type
Item
Output number
Judgement
0
0 to 15
Data
1
0 to 7
Output
Data correctly read:
<Measurement_result>
OK
Command not correct:
ER
Example
Input:
206
EXP 1 0
Section 8-4
Input Commands
The measurement result of the output expression for data 0 is
read.
Output: 28.195
OK
The measurement value is 28.195.
8-4-4
EXPPARA (EP): Expression Parameter
EXPPARA can be used to read or set evaluation criteria for
judgement output expressions.
Reading Evaluation Criteria for Judgement Output
Expressions
Input
EXPPARA <Judgement_number> <Parameter>
or
EP <Judgement_number> <Parameter>
· Specify a judgment number in the range 0 to 15.
· The contents of the parameters are as follows:
Parameter
Contents
0
Upper limit
1
Lower limit
Output
Data correctly read:
Command not correct:
<Evaluation_criteria>
OK
ER
Example
Input:
EXPPARA 0 0
The upper limit for judgement 0 is read.
Output:
100.000
OK
The upper limit is 100.000.
Setting Evaluation Criteria for Judgement Output
Expressions
Input
EXPPARA <Judgement_number> <Parameter>
<Value>
or
EP <Judgement_number> <Parameter> <Value>
207
Section 8-4
Input Commands
· Specify a judgement number in the range 0 to 15.
· The contents and setting range for the parameters are as follows:
Parameter
Contents
0
Upper-limit value (--9,999,999.999 to
9,999,999.999)
1
Lower-limit value (--9,999,999.999 to
9,999,999.999)
Output
Correct settings made:
Correct settings not made:
OK
ER
Example
Input:
EXPPARA 0 0 150.000
The upper limit for judgement 0 is changed to 150.000.
Output:
8-4-5
OK
IMGLOAD: Image Load
IMGLOAD is used to load image data from an external device.
Input
IMGLOAD <Memory_image_number>
· Specify a memory image number in the range 0 to 23. The
image data is loaded with Xmodem (-CRC or -SUM) protocol.
· When preparations to receive the data are completed, the
F150 will send a READY signal to the external device. Send
the data from the external device when the READY signal has
been received.
· Only image data that has been saved from an F150 can be
loaded.
Output
Data correctly loaded:
Data not correctly loaded:
OK
ER
Example
Input: IMGLOAD 2
Image data is loaded from the external device to memory
image 2.
Output:
8-4-6
OK
IMGSAVE: Image Save
IMGSAVE is used to save image data to an external device.
Input
IMGSAVE <Memory_image_number>
208
Section 8-4
Input Commands
· Specify a memory image number in the range 0 to 23. The
image data is saved with Xmodem (-CRC or -SUM) protocol.
· The memory image is transferred in BMP format.
Output
Data correctly saved:
OK
Data not correctly saved:
ER
Example
Input: IMGSAVE 2
The data in memory image 2 is saved to the external device.
Output:
8-4-7
OK
LITPARA: Light Parameter
LITPARA is used to read or change the light level of the Intelligent
Light Source.
Reading Light Level of Intelligent Light Source
Input
LITPARA <Camera_number>
Specify either 0 or 1 as the Camera number. If the 2-Camera Unit
is not used, specify 0.
Output
The light level is output as either a 5 or 8-digit number. Each digit
represents the level for one illuminated region in the range 0 to 7
(0 = not lit).
· F150-LTC20
As seen from the Camera
Section A
Section B
Section E
Section D
Section C
· F150-LTC50
Section A
Section H
Section B
Section G
Section C
Section F
Section D
Section E
209
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Data correctly read:
Command not correct:
<Light_level>
OK
ER
Example
Input:
LITPARA 0
The light level for the Intelligent Light Source (F150-LTC20)
connected to Camera 0 is read.
Output:
05555
OK
The distribution of light level is as shown below.
Changing Light Level of Intelligent Light Source
Input
LITPARA <Camera_number> <Light_level>
· Specify either 0 or 1 as the Camera number. If the 2-Camera
Unit is not used, specify 0.
· Depending on the model used, set either a 5 or 8-digit figure as
the light level. Refer to the graphics given in Reading Light
Level of Intelligent Light Source for details of the correspondence between digits and sections. Set a value between 0 and
7 for each digit. “0” represents the unlit state; the higher the
number the higher the light level.
Output
Data correctly set:
Command not correct:
OK
ER
Example
Input:
LITPARA 0 77777
The light level for the Intelligent Light Source (F150-LTC20)
connected to Camera 0 will be set in the way shown below.
Output:
210
OK
Section 8-4
Input Commands
8-4-8
MEASDATA (MD): Measure Data
MEASDATA is used to read measurement results.
Input
MEASDATA <Region_number> <Parameter>
or
MD <Region_number> <Parameter>
· Specify a region number in the range 0 to 15.
· The meaning of the parameter will vary according to the measurement method set for the region number specified. Refer to
the parameter lists following.
Output
Data correctly read:
<Measurement_result>
OK
Command not correct:
ER
Example
Input:
MD 0 2
Y coordinate measurement result for region 0 (gray search)
is read.
Output:
200.000
OK
The Y coordinate measurement value is 200.000.
211
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Lists of Parameters (Common to MEASDATA/POSIDATA)
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity and Axis
Angle
Parameter
Meaning
0
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
1
X coordinate of measured center of gravity
2
Y coordinate of measured center of gravity
3
X coordinate of reference center of gravity
4
Y coordinate of reference center of gravity
5
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference X coordinate of center of
gravity)
6
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference Y coordinate of center of
gravity)
7
Measured value for area
8
Reference value for area
9
Measured value for area -- reference value for area
10
Inverted area (area of measurement region -- measured
area)
11
Measured axis angle
12
Reference axis angle
13
Axis displacement (measured axis angle -- reference
axis angle)
Note Parameters 11 to 13 are only used when the measurement
method is binary center of gravity and axis angle.
Edge Pitch (MEASDATA Command Only)
Meaning
Parameter
212
0
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
1
Number of detected objects
2
Average pitch
3
Maximum pitch
4
Minimum pitch
5
Average width
6
Maximum width
7
Minimum width
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Gray Search, Precise Search
Parameter
Meaning
0
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
1
Measured X coordinate
2
Measured Y coordinate
3
Reference X coordinate
4
Reference Y coordinate
5
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate -reference X coordinate)
6
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate -reference Y coordinate)
7
Correlation value
Gray Edge Position
Meaning
Parameter
0
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
1
Measured edge coordinate
2
Reference edge coordinate
3
Displacement (measured coordinate -- reference
coordinate)
Surface Defect (MEASDATA Command Only)
Parameter
Meaning
0
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
1
Measured defect
2
Maximum density value
3
Minimum density value
Density Averaging (MEASDATA Command Only)
Parameter
Meaning
0
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
1
Measured average density
2
Reference average density
3
Difference between measured average density and
reference average density
213
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Relative Search (MEASDATA Command Only)
Parameter
8-4-9
Meaning
0
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
1
Measured X width
2
Measured Y width
3
Measured distance
4
Reference X width
5
Reference Y width
6
Reference distance
7
Difference in X widths (measured width -- reference
width)
8
Difference in Y widths (measured width -- reference
width)
9
Difference in distances (measured distance -- reference
distance)
10
Correlation with model 0
11
Correlation with model 1
MEASPARA (MP): Measure Parameter
MEASPARA can be used to read or set parameters for measurement regions.
Reading Measurement Region Parameters
Input
MEASPARA <Region_number> <Parameter>
or
MP <Region_number> <Parameter>
· Specify a region number in the range 0 to 15.
· The meaning of the parameter will vary according to the measurement method set for the region number specified. Refer to
the parameter lists following.
Output
Parameter correctly read:
<Value>
OK
Command not correct:
ER
Example
Input:
MP 0 1
Lower limit for X coordinate for region 0 (gray search) is
read.
214
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Output:
200.000
OK
The parameter is set to 200.000.
Setting Measurement Region Parameters
Input
MEASPARA <Region_number> <Parameter> <Value>
or
MP <Region_number> <Parameter> <Value>
· Specify a region number in the range 0 to 15.
· The meaning of the parameter and the possible values will vary
according to the measurement method set for the region number specified. Refer to the parameter lists following.
Output
Parameter correctly set:
OK
Parameter not correctly set:
ER
Example
Input: MP 0 1 400.000
Lower limit for X coordinate for region 0 (gray search) is set
to 400.000.
Output:
OK
215
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Lists of Parameters (Common to MEASPARA/POSIPARA)
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity and Axis
Angle
Parameter
Meaning
0
Upper limit of X coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
1
Lower limit of X coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
2
Upper limit of Y coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
3
Lower limit of Y coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
4
Upper limit of area (0 to 9,999,999.999)
5
Lower limit of area (0 to 9,999,999.999)
6
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
7
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
8
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
9
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
10
Upper limit of binary level (0 to 255)
11
Lower limit of binary level (0 to 255)
12
Binary level inversion (0: not inverted, 1: inverted)
13
Upper limit of axis angle (--180.000 to 180.000)
14
Lower limit of axis angle (--180.000 to 180.000)
Note Parameters 13 and 14 are only used when measurement
method is binary center of gravity and axis angle.
Gray Edge Position
Parameter
216
Meaning
0
Upper limit of position (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
1
Lower limit of position (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
2
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
3
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
4
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
5
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
6
Edge search direction (-: 0, ¯: 1, ®: 2, ¬: 3)
7
Edge color (Light ® Dark: 0, Dark ® Light: 1)
8
Level (0 to 100)
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Gray Search, Precise Search
Parameter
Meaning
0
Upper limit of X coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
1
Lower limit of X coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
2
Upper limit of Y coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
3
Lower limit of Y coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
4
Upper limit of correlation value (0 to 100)
5
Lower limit of correlation value (0 to 100)
6
Upper-left X coordinate of search region (0 to 511)
7
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region (0 to 483)
8
Lower-right X coordinate of search region (0 to 511)
9
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region (0 to 483)
10
X coordinate of reference position (0 to 511)
11
Y coordinate of reference position (0 to 483)
12
Search speed (0: LOW ® 1 ® 2 ® 3 ® 4: HIGH)
Edge Pitch (MEASPARA Command Only)
Parameter
Meaning
0
Upper limit of number of objects (0 to 255)
1
Lower limit of number of objects (0 to 255)
2
Upper limit of pitch (0 to 9,999.999)
3
Lower limit of pitch (0 to 9,999.999)
4
Upper limit of width (0 to 9,999.999)
5
Lower limit of width (0 to 9,999.999)
6
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
7
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
8
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
9
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
10
Counted object color (White: 0, Black: 1)
11
Edge level (0 to 100)
12
Minimum level (0 to 255)
217
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Surface Defect (MEASPARA Command Only)
Meaning
Parameter
0
Defect (0 to 255)
1
Upper limit of density value (0 to 255)
2
Lower limit of density value (0 to 255)
3
Element size (4 to 80)
4
Compare pitch (1 to 6)
5 to 10
See note
Note The meaning of parameters 5 to 10 varies according to the shape
of the region.
Parameter
Box
Line
Circumference
Arc
5
Upper-left X
coordinate of
region (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
start point (0 to
511)
X coordinate of
center (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
center (0 to 511)
6
Upper-left Y
coordinate of
region (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
start point (0 to
483)
Y coordinate of
center (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
center (0 to 483)
7
Lower-right X
coordinate of
region (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
end point (0 to
511)
Radius (1 to 512)
Radius (1 to 512)
8
Lower-right Y
coordinate of
region (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
end point (0 to
483)
Width (1 to 64)
Width (1 to 64)
9
---
Width (1 to 64)
---
Start angle
(--180.00 to
180.00)
10
---
---
---
End angle
(--180.00 to
180.00)
Density Averaging (MEASPARA Command Only)
Parameter
218
Meaning
0
Upper limit of average density (0.000 to 255.000)
1
Lower limit of average density (0.000 to 255.000)
2
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
3
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
4
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
5
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Relative Search (MEASPARA Command Only)
Parameter
Meaning
0
Upper limit of width X (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
1
Lower limit of width X (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
2
Upper limit of width Y (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
3
Lower limit of width Y (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
4
Upper limit of distance (0 to 9999.999)
5
Lower limit of distance (0 to 9999.999)
6
Upper limit of correlation with model 0 (0 to 100)
7
Lower limit of correlation with model 0 (0 to 100)
8
Upper limit of correlation with model 1 (0 to 100)
9
Lower limit of correlation with model 1 (0 to 100)
10
Upper-left X coordinate of search region for model 0 (0
to 511)
11
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region for model 0 (0
to 483)
12
Lower-right X coordinate of search region for model 0
(0 to 511)
13
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region for model 0
(0 to 483)
14
Upper-left X coordinate of search region for model 1 (0
to 511)
15
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region for model 1 (0
to 483)
16
Lower-right X coordinate of search region for model 1
(0 to 511)
17
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region for model 1
(0 to 483)
18
X coordinate of reference position for model 0 (0 to
511)
19
Y coordinate of reference position for model 0 (0 to
483)
20
X coordinate of reference position for model 1 (0 to
511)
21
Y coordinate of reference position for model 1 (0 to
483)
22
Search speed (0: LOW ® 1 ® 2 ® 3 ® 4: HIGH)
8-4-10 MEASURE: Measure
MEASURE is used to perform measurements one at a time or to
stop and start continuous measurements.
219
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Performing One Measurement
Input
MEASURE
or
M
Output
Measurement correctly performed:
<Measurement_results> ® p 227
OK
Measurement not correctly performed: ER
Executing One Measurement on Currently Displayed Image
MEASURE /I
or
M /I
Output
Measurement correctly performed:
<Measurement_results> ® p 227
OK
Measurement not correctly performed: ER
Starting Continuous Measurements
Input
MEASURE /C
or
M /C
Output
Measurement correctly performed:
OK delimiter <Continuous_measurement_results>
® p 227
Measurement not correctly performed: ER
Stopping Continuous Measurements
Input
MEASURE /E
or
M /E
Output
Measurement correctly stopped:
220
OK
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Measurement not correctly stopped:
ER
8-4-11 MENUKEY
MENUKEY is used to switch RS-232C input to Menu operation
mode.
Input
MENUKEY
Output
Nothing is output for this command.
Return to Normal mode from Menu operation mode by inputting
CTRL + Q($11).
8-4-12 MODELSET: Model Set
MODELSET is used to re-register the model based on the currently displayed image.
Input
MODELSET <Region_number>
· Specify a region number in the range 0 to 15. This command is
only valid for regions where the measurement method is gray
search or precise search.
Output
Model correctly registered:
OK
Model not correctly registered:
ER
Example
Input:
MODELSET 2
The model for region 2 (gray search) is registered.
Output:
OK
If a region for which the measurement method is not gray search
or precise search is specified, the command will be ignored but
an OK will be output.
Example
If region 1, for which the measurement method is set to binary
center of gravity and area, is specified:
Input:
Output:
MODELSET 1
OK
No settings are made.
Two-camera
Operation
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, since
MODELSET registers the image currently displayed, display the
221
Section 8-4
Input Commands
region for the desired Camera before execution. Use the Up/
Down Console Keys to switch Camera images. By executing the
MENUKEY command, Camera images can be switched from a
personal computer using the key codes equivalent to the Up/
Down Console keys.
8-4-13 POSIDATA (PD): Position Data
POSIDATA is used to read position compensation results or
position displacements.
Reading Position Compensation Result
Input
POSIDATA
<Position_Compensation_Region_Number>
<Parameter>
· Specify a position compensation region number of 0 or 1.
Two-camera
Operation
If two Cameras are used, specify 0 or 1 (for Position compensation 0), or 10 or 11 (for Position compensation 1).
· The meaning of the parameter will vary according to the position compensation method for the specified region. The
parameters are the same as for MEASDATA. Refer to the
MEASDATA parameter lists given previously in this section.
Output
Data correctly read:
<Position_compensation result>
OK
Command not correct:
ER
Example
Input:
POSIDATA 0 2
Y coordinate measurement value for position compensation
region 0 (gray search) is read.
Output:
200.000
OK
Y coordinate measurement value is 200.000.
Reading Displacement Value
Input
POSIDATA <Parameter 1> <Parameter 2>
· Specify 2 for parameter 1.
Two-camera
Operation
222
If two Cameras are used, specify 2 (for Position compensation
0) or 12 (for Position compensation 1) for parameter 1.
Section 8-4
Input Commands
· The meanings of parameter 2 settings are as follows:
Meaning
Parameter
0
Displacement in X direction (reference X coordinate -measured X coordinate)
1
Displacement in Y direction (reference Y coordinate -measured Y coordinate)
2
Angle displacement (reference angle -- measured
angle)
Output
Data correctly read:
Command not correct:
<Position_displacement>
OK
ER
Example
Input:
POSIDATA 2 0
Position displacement in the X direction is read.
Output:
95.65
OK
Displacement in the X direction is 95.65.
8-4-14 POSIPARA (PP): Position Parameter
POSIPARA is used to read or set position compensation region
parameters.
Reading Position Compensation Region Parameters
Input
POSIPARA <Position_compensation_region_number>
<Parameter>
or
PP <Position_compensation_region_number>
<Parameter>
· Select a position compensation region number of 0 or 1.
Two-camera
Operation
If two Cameras are used, specify 0 or 1 (for Position compensation 0), or 10 or 11 (for Position compensation 1).
· The meaning of the parameter will vary according to the position compensation method for the specified region. The
parameters are the same as for MEASPARA. Refer to the
MEASPARA parameter lists given previously in this section.
Output
Parameter correctly read:
<Value>
OK
223
Section 8-4
Input Commands
Command not correct:
ER
Example
Input:
PP 0 1
Lower limit of the X coordinate for position compensation
region 0 (gray search) is read.
Output:
200.000
OK
Lower limit of the X coordinate is set to 200.000.
Setting Position Compensation Region Parameters
Input
POSIPARA <Position_compensation_region_number>
<Parameter> <Value>
or
PP <Position_compensation_region_number>
<Parameter> <Value>
· Select a position compensation region number of 0 or 1.
Two-camera
Operation
If two Cameras are used, specify 0 or 1 (for Position compensation 0), or 10 or 11 (for Position compensation 1).
· The meaning of the parameter will vary according to the position compensation method for the specified region. The
parameters are the same as for MEASPARA. Refer to the
MEASPARA parameter lists given previously in this section.
Output
Parameter correctly set:
OK
Parameter not correctly set:
ER
Example
Input:
PP 0 1 400
Lower limit of the X coordinate for position compensation
region 0 (gray search) is changed to 400.000.
Output:
OK
8-4-15 RESET: Reset
RESET is used to reset the F150.
Input
RESET
Output
Nothing is output for this command.
224
Section 8-4
Input Commands
8-4-16 SCENE: Scene
SCENE is used to read the currently displayed scene number or
switch scene.
Reading the Scene Number
Input
SCENE
Output
Data correctly read:
<Scene_number>
OK
Command not correct:
ER
Example
Input:
Output:
SCENE
0
OK
Scene 0 is displayed.
Switching the Scene
Input
SCENE <Scene_number>
· Specify a scene number in the range 0 to 15.
Output
Scene correctly switched:
OK
Scene not correctly switched: ER
Example
Input:
SCENE 2
The measurement scene is changed to scene 2.
Output:
OK
8-4-17 SCNLOAD: Scene Load
SCNLOAD is used to load scene data from a computer or other
external device.
Input
SCNLOAD <Scene_number>
· Specify a scene number in the range 0 to 15. The scene data is
transferred with Xmodem (-CRC or -SUM) protocol.
· When preparations to receive the data are completed, the
F150 will send a READY signal to the external device. Send
225
Section 8-4
Input Commands
the data from the external device when the READY signal has
been received.
Output
Data correctly loaded:
Data not correctly loaded:
OK
ER
Example
Input:
SCNLOAD 2
Data is loaded to scene 2 from an external device.
Output:
OK
8-4-18 SCNSAVE: Scene Save
SCNSAVE is used to save scene data to a computer or other
external device.
Input
SCNSAVE <Scene_number>
· Specify a scene number in the range 0 to 15. The scene data is
transferred with Xmodem (-CRC or -SUM) protocol.
Output
Data correctly saved:
Data not correctly saved:
OK
ER
Example
Input:
SCNSAVE 2
Data from scene 2 is saved to an external device.
Output:
OK
8-4-19 SYSLOAD: System Load
SYSLOAD is used to load system data from a computer or other
external device.
Input
SYSLOAD
· When preparations to receive the data are completed, the
F150 will send a READY signal to the external device. Send
the data from the external device when the READY signal has
been received.
Output
Data correctly loaded:
Data not correctly loaded:
Example
Input:
226
SYSLOAD
OK
ER
Section 8-5
Measurement Results Output Format
System data is loaded from an external device.
Output:
OK
8-4-20 SYSSAVE: System Save
SYSSAVE is used to save system data to a computer or other
external device.
Input
SYSSAVE
Output
Data correctly saved:
OK
Data not correctly saved:
ER
Example
Input:
SYSSAVE
System data is saved to an external device.
Output:
OK
8-4-21 VERGET: Version Get
VERGET is used to read information about the system version.
Input
VERGET
Output
Data correctly read:
<Version_information>
OK
Data not correctly read:
ER
Example
Input:
VERGET
Version information is read.
F150-C10E-3 Ver3.00 XXXX/XX/XX
XX:XX
OK
Output:
8-5
Measurement Results Output Format
Measurement results are output in ASCII in order from the smallest output number to the largest.
The measurement results are output in the normal format even in
Menu operation mode.
The amount of output data will depend on the number of digits in
the measurement values.
227
Measurement Results Output Format
Section 8-5
[<Measurement_results_for_data_0>],
[<Measurement_results_for_data_1>],
[<Measurement_results_for_data_2>],
[<Measurement_results_for_data_3>],
[<Measurement_results_for_data_4>],
[<Measurement_results_for_data_5>],
[<Measurement_results_for_data_6>],
[<Measurement_results_for_data_7>]
· Outputs are made in decimal, with a maximum of 7 digits
before the decimal point and 3 digits after. The number of digits
before the decimal point that are actually displayed will vary
according to the measurement value but the number of digits
after the decimal point is fixed to 3.
· Calibrated values are output. Output values will be in the range
--9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999. If the measurement value is
less than --9,999,999.999, then --9,999,999.999 will be output.
If the measurement value is greater than 9,999,999.999, then
9,999,999.999 will be output.
· When a judgement is set, either 0 (OK) or --1 (NG) will be output.
Note The output of data after measurement is performed in Run mode
will continue until all of the data has been output, even if the mode
is changed. Data output will not be interrupted.
228
SECTION 9
RS-232C Host Link Settings
This section describes the communications settings for the RS-232C port when communications are in Host Link mode.
Communications in Host Link mode are only supported for the F150-C10E-3 and
F150-C15E-3.
9-1
9-2
9-3
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
9-1-1
9-1-2
FlowCharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
236
Command Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
242
9-3-1
9-3-2
9-3-3
9-3-4
9-3-5
9-3-6
9-3-7
9-3-8
9-3-9
9-3-10
9-3-11
9-3-12
9-3-13
9-3-14
242
243
243
243
243
243
244
244
244
245
245
248
253
9-3-15
9-3-16
9-3-17
9-3-18
9-3-19
9-3-20
9-4
9-5
0010: ONE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0011: CONTINUOUS MEASUREMENT . . . . . .
0012: STOP MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0020: SWITCH SCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0021: INCREMENT SCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0022: DECREMENT SCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0023: READ SCENE NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0040: MODEL REGISTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0066: SAVE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0092: RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0080: READ MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1060: SET PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1070: READ PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1100: SET JUDGEMENT OUTPUT EXPRESSION
CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1110: READ JUDGEMENT OUTPUT EXPRESSION
CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1120: SET LIGHT LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1130: READ LIGHT LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1210: READ POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1220: READ JUDGEMENT OUTPUT EXPRESSION
RESULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1221: READ DATA OUTPUT EXPRESSION
RESULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254
255
256
256
257
260
261
262
265
229
Communications Settings
9-1
Communications Settings
9-1-1
FlowCharts
Section 9-1
Select Host Link for the communications mode to communicate
in Host Link format with a Programmable Controller or other host
device via the RS-232C port.
Set Mode
Command inputs cannot be received.
Monitor
Mode
Command inputs can be received, but measurement results are
not output to external devices. If a command to read a set value is
input, that value will be output.
Run Mode
Both command input and measurement result output are supported.
Note The output of data after measurement is performed in Run mode,
will continue until all of the data has been output, even if the mode
is changed. Data output will not be interrupted.
230
Section 9-1
Communications Settings
I/O via RS-232C Port
Commands for the F150 are written to the Read Area in the Programmable Controller. The F150 will automatically read these
commands, execute them, and write any results to the Write
Area.
F150
Programmable Controller
Unit No.: 00 (fixed)
Checks Read Area for a
command.
Returns command.
Command sent to clear
Read Area.
* The rest of the operation
is not performed if the command format is incorrect.
Read Area cleared.
Executes command.
*Terminal block BUSY terminal turned ON during command execution.
No
Command
requires output of
results?
Yes
Writes data to Write Area.
*A timeout error will occur if there is
no response within 5 s. An error message will appear on the screen and
the error terminal will turn ON.
Returns write completed
response.
231
Section 9-1
Communications Settings
Inputting Measurement Trigger from STEP Terminal
If measurement triggers are to be input from the STEP terminal,
set the Read Area to “None.”
Programmable Controller
F150
STEP signal input.
Unit No.: 00 (fixed)
Executes measurement.
*Terminal block BUSY terminal
turned ON during measurements.
Writes data to Write Area.
Returns write completed
response.
End
*A timeout error will occur if there is no response within 5 s. An error
message will appear on the screen and the error terminal will turn ON.
Input the next STEP signal after all data output has been completed.
232
Section 9-1
Communications Settings
Using TXD Instructions
Commands are sent from the Programmable Controller to the
F150 using TXD instructions in the Programmable Controller’s
ladder program instead of the Read Area.
If TXD instructions are to be used to send commands, set the
Read Area to “None.”
Programmable Controller
F150
Unit No.: 00 (fixed)
Executes command.
Send the TXD
instruction.
*Set the number of bytes of send
data to 10. (Words that are not
included in the command format
can be set to either 0 or 1.)
*Terminal block BUSY terminal
turned ON during command
execution.
No
Command
requires output of
results?
Yes
Writes data to Write Area.
Returns write completed
response.
End
*A timeout error will occur if there is no response within 5 s.
An error message will appear on the screen and the error
terminal will turn ON.
233
Section 9-1
Communications Settings
9-1-2
Communications Settings
Baud Rate and Communications Mode
The following explains how to set the baud rate, data length, and
other communications specifications.
The same communications settings must be used on both the
F150 and the external device (Programmable Controller).
Item
Setting
Use the same
settings on the
Programmable
Controller.
Baud rate
2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/
38,400* (bps)
Data length
7, 8* (bits)
Parity bits
None*, even, odd
Stop bits
1*, 2 (bits)
Delimiter
CR*, LF, CR+LF
Mode
Normal*, Host Link, Menu. Select Host Link
Use at a baud
rate of 9,600
bps or less.
Note The default settings are marked with asterisks (*).
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
234
Section 9-1
Communications Settings
2 Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT Key.
Scn 0 B MON B
---
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Freeze
3 Select SYS.
4 Select Communications.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
235
Communications Settings
5 Select RS-232C.
System settings
Communications
Output RS-232C
Device settings
Normal
Display Host link
Set key operation
Terminal block
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
6 Set the items.
7 Select End to enter the settings.
236
Section 9-1
Section 9-1
Communications Settings
Setting the Read and Write Areas in the Programmable
Controller
This section explains how to set the Read Area from which the
F150 reads commands and the Write Area to which the F150
outputs results. Both of these areas are in the memory of the Programmable Controller.
Item
Selection
Read Area
Select the Read Area from which the
F150 reads commands.
I/O*, HR (holding relay), LR (link relay),
DM (data memory), None (See note 2.)
Begin read word
Set the first word to read in area
specified above (0 to 9995). The
default setting is 0.
Write Area
Select the Write Area to which the
F150 outputs results.
I/O*, HR (holding relay), LR (link relay),
DM (data memory), None (See note 3.)
Begin write word
Programmable
Controller mode
check
Note
Set the first word to write in the area
specified above (0 to 9996). The
default is 100.
ON*
Checks the mode of the Programmable
Controller when the F150 enters
Monitor or Run mode. Measurement
will not be performed unless the
Programmable Controller is in Monitor
mode. (An error message will be
displayed.)
OFF
Sends a command to the
Programmable Controller to change
mode to Monitor mode when the F150
enters Monitor or Run mode.
1. The default settings are marked with asterisks (*).
2. When the read area setting is “None,” the F150 will not read
data. However, TXD instructions are received.
3. When the write area setting is “None,” the F150 will not output data.
237
Communications Settings
Section 9-1
Procedure
1 Select Host link.
System settings
Communications
Output RS-232C
Device settings
Normal
Display Host link
Set key operation
Terminal block
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
2 Set the items.
Refer to the following page for details on inputting values: ® p. 26
3 Select End to enter the settings.
238
Section 9-2
Command Tables
9-2
Command Tables
The following commands can be input from the host device to the
F150.
Set the command to be executed in the Read Area of the Programmable Controller.
Commands that Control F150 Operation
The following commands control F150 operation.
Command code
Function
Page
0010
Executes one measurement.
240
0011
Starts continuous measurement.
241
0012
Stops continuous measurement.
241
0020
Changes to a specified scene number.
241
0021
Increases the displayed scene number
by one.
241
0022
Decreases the displayed scene number
by one.
241
0040
Registers the model.
242
0066
Saves all data to flash memory.
242
0092
Resets the F150.
243
Commands that Read Measurement Results
The following commands read the results of the most recent
measurement.
Command code
Function
Page
0080
Reads measurement results of the
measurement region.
243
1210
Reads distances scrolled for position
displacement compensation.
255
1220
Reads calculation results for judgement
output expressions.
258
1221
Reads calculation results for data output
expressions.
259
239
Section 9-3
Input Format
Commands that Read Current Settings
The following commands read settings such as evaluation criteria. F150 operation can be controlled from the host while monitoring F150 settings.
Command code
Function
Page
0023
Reads number of currently displayed
scene.
242
1070
Reads parameters for measurement
region.
251
1110
Reads evaluation criteria for judgement
output expressions.
253
1130
Reads light level of Intelligent Light
Source.
254
Commands that Change F150 Settings
The following commands perform settings such as for evaluation
criteria. F150 operation can be controlled from the host while
monitoring F150 settings.
Command code
9-3
Function
Page
1060
Sets parameters for measurement
region.
246
1100
Sets evaluation criteria for judgement
output expressions.
252
1120
Sets light level of Intelligent Light
Source.
254
Input Format
This section explains the command formats in order of the command codes. Commands are input in BCD. Set the commands
starting from the begin read word of the Read Area. The “-” indicates that either 0 or 1 can be set.
9-3-1
0010: ONE MEASUREMENT
Executes one measurement.
Input
Begin read
word
+0
240
Bits
15 to 12
0000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0001
3 to 0
0000
Command code
Section 9-3
Input Format
The measurement results are output. ® p 260
9-3-2
0011: CONTINUOUS MEASUREMENT
Starts continuous measurement.
Input
Begin read
word
+0
Bits
15 to 12
0000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0001
3 to 0
0001
Command code
The measurement results are output. ® p 260
9-3-3
0012: STOP MEASUREMENT
Stops continuous measurement.
Input
Begin read
word
+0
9-3-4
Bits
15 to 12
0000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0001
3 to 0
0010
Command code
0020: SWITCH SCENE
Switches to a specified scene number.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0000
0000
0010
0000
Command code
+1
----
----
10’s digit
1’s digit
Scene No. (00 to 15)
9-3-5
0021: INCREMENT SCENE
Increments the current scene number.
If the current scene number is 15, switches to scene 0.
Input
Begin read
word
+0
9-3-6
Bits
15 to 12
0000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0010
3 to 0
0001
Command code
0022: DECREMENT SCENE
Decrements the current scene number.
If the current scene number is 0, switches to scene 15.
Input
Begin read
word
+0
Bits
15 to 12
0000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0010
3 to 0
0010
Command code
241
Section 9-3
Input Format
9-3-7
0023: READ SCENE NUMBER
Reads the currently displayed scene number.
Input
Begin read
word
+0
Bits
15 to 12
0000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0010
3 to 0
0011
Command code
Output
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag
+1
0000
0000
10’s digit
1’s digit
Scene No. (00 to 15)
Write Flag: Changes between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor the flag to check if the data has been written.
9-3-8
0040: MODEL REGISTER
Re-registers the model based on the currently displayed image.
(With through display, re-registers the model based on the measurement image input immediately before.) Only valid when the
measurement method for the specified region is gray search or
precise search. If any other regions are specified the command
will be ignored.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0000
0000
0100
0000
Command code
+1
----
----
10’s digit
1’s digit
Region No. (00 to 15)
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, since
MODELSET registers the image currently displayed, display the
region for the desired Camera before execution. Use the Up/
Down Console Keys to switch Camera images.
Two-camera
Operation
9-3-9
0066: SAVE DATA
Saves all data to flash memory.
Input
Begin read
word
+0
242
Bits
15 to 12
0000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0110
3 to 0
0110
Command code
Section 9-3
Input Format
9-3-10 0092: RESET
Resets the F150.
Input
Begin read
word
+0
Bits
15 to 12
0000
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
0000
1001
3 to 0
0010
Command code
9-3-11 0080: READ MEASUREMENT
Reads measurement results for the region measured last.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0000
0000
1000
0000
Command code
+1
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (00 to 15)
Data type (00 to 13)
Output
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag
+1
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion.
+2
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign.
+3
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Write Flag: Changes between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor the flag to check if the data has been written.
Sign: Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
243
Section 9-3
Input Format
Data Types
The data types that can be read will vary according to the measurement method for the specified region.
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity and Axis
Angle
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
X coordinate of measured center of gravity
02
Y coordinate of measured center of gravity
03
X coordinate of reference center of gravity
04
Y coordinate of reference center of gravity
05
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference X coordinate of center of
gravity)
06
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference Y coordinate of center of
gravity)
07
Measured value for area
08
Reference value for area
09
Difference between reference and measured area
10
Inverted area (area of measurement region -- measured
area)
11
Measured axis angle
12
Reference axis angle
13
Axis displacement (measured axis angle -- reference
axis angle)
Note Parameters 11 to 13 are only used when measurement method
is binary center of gravity and axis angle.
Gray Edge Position
Parameter
244
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured edge coordinate
02
Reference edge coordinate
03
Displacement (measured coordinate -- reference
coordinate)
Section 9-3
Input Format
Surface Defect
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured defect
02
Maximum density value
03
Minimum density value
Density Averaging
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured average density
02
Reference average density
03
Difference between measured average density and
reference average density
Gray Search, Precise Search
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured X coordinate
02
Measured Y coordinate
03
Reference X coordinate
04
Reference Y coordinate
05
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate -reference X coordinate)
06
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate -reference Y coordinate)
07
Correlation value
Edge Pitch
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Number of detected objects
02
Average pitch
03
Maximum pitch
04
Minimum pitch
05
Average width
06
Maximum width
07
Minimum width
245
Section 9-3
Input Format
Relative Search
Meaning
Parameter
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured X width
02
Measured Y width
03
Measured distance
04
Reference X width
05
Reference Y width
06
Reference distance
07
Difference in X widths (measured width -- reference
width)
08
Difference in Y widths (measured width -- reference
width)
09
Difference in distances (measured distance -- reference
distance)
10
Correlation with model 0
11
Correlation with model 1
9-3-12 1060: SET PARAMETER
Sets parameters for measurement regions.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0000
0110
0000
Command code
+1
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (00 to 15)
+2
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion of
setting data.
+3
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion of
setting data and sign.
+4
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion of
setting data.
246
Data type (00 to 14)
Section 9-3
Input Format
Data Types
The data types that can be set will vary according to the measurement method for the specified region.
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity and Axis
Angle
Parameter
Meaning
00
Upper limit of X coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
01
Lower limit of X coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
02
Upper limit of Y coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
03
Lower limit of Y coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
04
Upper limit of area (0 to 9,999,999.999)
05
Lower limit of area (0 to 9,999,999.999)
06
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
07
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
08
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
09
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
10
Upper limit of binary level (0 to 255)
11
Lower limit of binary level (0 to 255)
12
Binary level inversion (0: not inverted, 1: inverted)
13
Upper limit of axis angle (--180.000 to 180.000)
14
Lower limit of axis angle (--180.000 to 180.000)
Note Parameters 13 and 14 are only used when measurement
method is binary center of gravity and axis angle.
Gray Edge Position
Meaning
Parameter
00
Upper limit of position (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
01
Lower limit of position (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
02
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
03
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
04
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
05
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
06
Edge search direction (-: 0, ¯: 1, ®: 2, ¬: 3)
07
Edge color (Light ® Dark: 0, Dark ® Light: 1)
08
Level (0 to 100)
247
Section 9-3
Input Format
Gray Search, Precise Search
Parameter
Meaning
00
Upper limit of X coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
01
Lower limit of X coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
02
Upper limit of Y coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
03
Lower limit of Y coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
04
Upper limit of correlation value (0 to 100)
05
Lower limit of correlation value (0 to 100)
06
Upper-left X coordinate of search region (0 to 511)
07
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region (0 to 483)
08
Lower-right X coordinate of search region (0 to 511)
09
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region (0 to 483)
10
X coordinate of reference position (0 to 511)
11
Y coordinate of reference position (0 to 483)
12
Search speed (0: LOW ® 1 ® 2 ® 3 ® 4: HIGH)
Edge Pitch
Parameter
248
Meaning
00
Upper limit of number of objects (0 to 255)
01
Lower limit of number of objects (0 to 255)
02
Upper limit of pitch (0 to 9,999.999)
03
Lower limit of pitch (0 to 9,999.999)
04
Upper limit of width (0 to 9,999.999)
05
Lower limit of width (0 to 9,999.999)
06
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
07
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
08
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
09
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
10
Counted object color (White: 0, Black: 1)
11
Edge level (0 to 100)
12
Minimum level (0 to 255)
Section 9-3
Input Format
Density Averaging
Parameter
Meaning
00
Upper limit of average density (0.000 to 255.000)
01
Lower limit of average density (0.000 to 255.000)
02
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
03
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
04
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
05
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
249
Section 9-3
Input Format
Relative Search
Parameter
250
Meaning
00
Upper limit of width X (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
01
Lower limit of width X (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
02
Upper limit of width Y (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
03
Lower limit of width Y (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
04
Upper limit of distance (0 to 9999.999)
05
Lower limit of distance (0 to 9999.999)
06
Upper limit of correlation with model 0 (0 to 100)
07
Lower limit of correlation with model 0 (0 to 100)
08
Upper limit of correlation with model 1 (0 to 100)
09
Lower limit of correlation with model 1 (0 to 100)
10
Upper-left X coordinate of search region for model 0 (0
to 511)
11
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region for model 0 (0
to 483)
12
Lower-right X coordinate of search region for model 0
(0 to 511)
13
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region for model 0
(0 to 483)
14
Upper-left X coordinate of search region for model 1 (0
to 511)
15
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region for model 1 (0
to 483)
16
Lower-right X coordinate of search region for model 1
(0 to 511)
17
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region for model 1
(0 to 483)
18
X coordinate of reference position for model 0 (0 to
511)
19
Y coordinate of reference position for model 0 (0 to
483)
20
X coordinate of reference position for model 1 (0 to
511)
21
Y coordinate of reference position for model 1 (0 to
483)
22
Search speed (0: LOW ® 1 ® 2 ® 3 ® 4: HIGH)
Section 9-3
Input Format
Surface Defect
Meaning
Parameter
00
Defect (0 to 255)
01
Upper limit of density value (0 to 255)
02
Lower limit of density value (0 to 255)
03
Element size (4 to 80)
04
Compare pitch (1 to 6)
05 to 10
See note
Note The meanings of parameters 5 to 10 vary according to the shape
of the region.
Parameter
Box
Line
Circumference
Arc
05
Upper-left X
coordinate of
region (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
start point (0 to
511)
X coordinate of
center (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
center (0 to 511)
06
Upper-left Y
coordinate of
region (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
start point (0 to
483)
Y coordinate of
center (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
center (0 to 483)
07
Lower-right X
coordinate of
region (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
end point (0 to
511)
Radius (1 to 512)
Radius (1 to 512)
08
Lower-right Y
coordinate of
region (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
end point (0 to
483)
Width (1 to 64)
Width (1 to 64)
09
---
Width (1 to 64)
---
Start angle
(--180.00 to
180.00)
10
---
---
---
End angle
(--180.00 to
180.00)
9-3-13 1070: READ PARAMETER
Reads parameters for measurement regions. The data types are
the same as for command 1060. Refer to the parameter lists
above.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0000
0111
0000
Command code
+1
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (00 to 15)
Data type (00 to 14)
251
Section 9-3
Input Format
Output
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag
+1
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
+2
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign
+3
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Write Flag: Changes between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor the flag to check if the data has been written.
Sign: Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
9-3-14 1100: SET JUDGEMENT OUTPUT EXPRESSION
CRITERIA
Sets evaluation criteria for judgement output expressions.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0001
0000
0000
Command code
+1
0000
Type
10’s digit
1’s digit
Judgement number (00
to 15) and type
+2
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
+3
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign
+4
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Type:
Sign:
252
Upper limit: 0000, Lower limit: 0001
Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
Section 9-3
Input Format
9-3-15 1110: READ JUDGEMENT OUTPUT
EXPRESSION CRITERIA
Reads evaluation criteria for judgement output expressions.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0001
0001
0000
Command code
+1
0000
Type
10’s digit
of judgement
number
1’s digit of
judgement
number
Judgement number (00
to 15) and type
Type:
Upper limit: 0000, Lower limit: 0001
Output
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag
+1
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
+2
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign.
+3
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Write Flag: Changes between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor the flag to check if the data has been written.
Sign: Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
253
Section 9-3
Input Format
9-3-16 1120: SET LIGHT LEVEL
Sets the light level for the Intelligent Light Source.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0001
0010
0000
Command code
+1
0000
0000
0000
Camera
number
Camera number (0 or
1)
+2
Light level
for
section B
Light level
for
section C
Light level
for
section D
Light level
for
section E
Light level for each
section
+3
0000
0000
0000
Light level
for
section A
+4
0000
Light level
for
section F
Light level
for
section G
Light level
for
section H
F150-LTC20
(0 to 7; 0 = unlit)
F150-LTC50
F to H always set to 0
9-3-17 1130: READ LIGHT LEVEL
Reads the light level for the Intelligent Light Source. For details of
the positions of the sections, refer to 1120: SET LIGHT LEVEL.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0001
0011
0000
Command code
+1
0000
0000
0000
Camera
number
Camera number (0 or
1)
254
Section 9-3
Input Format
Output
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag
+1
Light level
for
section B
Light level
for
section C
Light level
for
section D
Light level
for
section E
Light level for each
section
+2
0000
0000
0000
Light level
for
section A
+3
0000
Light level
for
section F
Light level
for
section G
Light level
for
section H
(0 to 7; 0 = unlit)
Write Flag: Changes between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor the flag to check if the data has been written.
9-3-18 1210: READ POSITION
Reads measurement values related to position displacement
compensation for most recent measurement.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0010
0001
0000
Command code
+1
0000
Region
No.
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (0 or 1; to
read displacement: 2)
Data type (00 to 13)
If two Cameras are used, specify 0 or 1 (for Position compensation 0), or 10 or 11 (for Position compensation 1) for the region
number. To read the displacement, specify 2 (for Position compensation 0) or 12 (for Position compensation 1).
Two-camera
Operation
Output
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write flag
+1
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
+2
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign
+3
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Write Flag: Changes between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor the flag to check if the data has been written.
Sign: Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
255
Section 9-3
Input Format
Data Types
The data types that can be read will vary according to the measurement method for the specified region.
Gray Edge Position
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured edge coordinate
02
Reference edge coordinate
03
Displacement (measured coordinate -- reference
coordinate)
Position Displacement
Parameter
256
Meaning
00
Displacement in X direction (reference X coordinate -measured X coordinate)
01
Displacement in Y direction (reference Y coordinate -measured Y coordinate)
02
Angle displacement (reference angle -- measured
angle)
Section 9-3
Input Format
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity and Axis
Angle
Meaning
Parameter
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
X coordinate of measured center of gravity
02
Y coordinate of measured center of gravity
03
X coordinate of reference center of gravity
04
Y coordinate of reference center of gravity
05
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference X coordinate of center of
gravity)
06
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference Y coordinate of center of
gravity)
07
Measured value for area
08
Reference value for area
09
Difference between reference and measured area
10
Inverted area (area of measurement region -- measured
area)
11
Measured axis angle
12
Reference axis angle
13
Axis displacement (measured axis angle -- reference
axis angle)
Note Parameters 11 to 13 are only used when the measurement
method is binary center of gravity and axis angle.
Gray Search
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured X coordinate
02
Measured Y coordinate
03
Reference X coordinate
04
Reference Y coordinate
05
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate -reference X coordinate)
06
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate -reference Y coordinate)
07
Correlation value
257
Section 9-3
Input Format
9-3-19 1220: READ JUDGEMENT OUTPUT
EXPRESSION RESULT
Reads calculation results of judgement output expressions for
the most recent measurement.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0010
0010
0000
Command code
+1
0000
0000
10’s digit
1’s digit
Judgement number (00
to 15)
Output
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag
+1
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion of
calculation result
+2
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion of
calculation result and
sign
+3
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Write Flag: Changes between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor the flag to check if the data has been written.
Sign: Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
258
Section 9-3
Input Format
9-3-20 1221: READ DATA OUTPUT EXPRESSION
RESULT
Reads calculation results of data output expressions for the most
recent measurement.
Input
Begin read
word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
0001
0010
0010
0001
Command code
+1
0000
0000
0000
1’s digit
Data number (0 to 7)
Output
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag
+1
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
calculation result
+2
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion of
calculation result and
sign
+3
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Write Flag: Changes between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor the flag to check if the data has been written.
Sign: Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
259
Section 9-4
Output Format
9-4
Output Format
When a measurement is executed, the results are output in BCD
to the Write Area of the Programmable Controller. The output will
be in order, starting with the smallest output number.
Write Flag switches between 0000 and 1111 each time data is output.
Monitor this flag to see when measurement results have been written.
The Write Flag will be 0000 after the first measurement and so set the flag
to an initial setting of 1111.
Begin
write word
Bits
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
Write Flag
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag
+1
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
+2
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign
+3
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
0000: Positive
1111: Negative
Calibrated values are output.
Measurements from --9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999 can be output.
Measurements less than --9,999,999.999 are output as “--9,999,999.999.”
Measurement greater than 9,999,999.999 are output as “9,999,999.999.”
When the output is set to a judgment, the output will be one of the following:
OK: 0
NG: --1
Note The output of data after measurement is performed in Run mode,
will continue until all of the data has been output, even if the mode
is changed. Data output will not be interrupted.
260
Section 9-4
Output Format
Data 2
Data 0
Example 1:
Calculation result of 143.250 for data output 0.
No setting for data output 1.
Calculation result of --6943.298 for data output 2.
Bits
Begin
write word
15 to 12
+0
0000
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag (0000)
+1
0000
0001
0100
0011
Rightmost 4 digits of integral
portion
+2
0000
0000
0000
0000
Leftmost 2 digits of integral
portion and sign
+3
0000
0010
0101
0000
Decimal portion
+4
0000
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag (0000)
+5
0110
1001
0100
0011
Rightmost 4 digits of integral
portion
+6
1111
0000
0000
0000
Leftmost 2 digits of integral
portion and sign
+7
0000
0010
1001
1000
Decimal portion
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
Output numbers for which settings have not been made are not
output (as data output 1 above).
261
Section 9-4
Output Format
Example 2:
If expressions are set for all data outputs (0 to 7), the measurement results will be output in two groups.
Group 1: Calculation results for data outputs 0 to 6.
Group 2: Calculation result for data output 7.
15 to 12
+0
0000
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag (0000)
+1
0000
0001
0100
0011
Rightmost 4 digits of integral
portion
+2
0000
0000
0000
0000
Leftmost 2 digits of integral
portion and sign
0000
0010
0101
0000
Decimal portion
+(4 x n) + 0
0000
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag (0000)
+(4 x n) + 1
0110
1001
0100
0011
Rightmost 4 digits of integral
portion
+(4 x n) + 2
1111
0000
0000
0000
Leftmost 2 digits of integral
portion and sign
+(4 x n) + 3
0000
0010
1001
1000
Decimal portion
+28
1111
0000
0000
0000
Write Flag (1111)
+29
0000
0001
0100
0011
Rightmost 4 digits of integral
portion
+30
0000
0000
0000
0000
Leftmost 2 digits of integral
portion and sign
+31
0000
0010
0101
0000
Decimal portion
+3
Group 1
Bits
Begin
write word
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
.
.
.
Group 2
.
.
.
262
Section 9-5
Sample Ladder Program
9-5
Sample Ladder Program
This section provides a sample ladder program for the OMRON
C200H/C200HS Programmable Controller.
In this program, the Run command is input from the Programmable Controller to the F150, and the judgement results are output back to the Programmable Controller from the F150.
Programmable Controller Settings
Use the following communications settings for a Host Link Unit
on the Programmable Controller, or the Host Link port built into
the CPU Unit.
Refer to the Programmable Controller manuals for detailed setting instructions.
Item
Setting
Communications
protocol
SYSWAY (Host Link)
1:1/1:N
1:N
Unit no.
00
Baud rate
Make the same settings as for the F150.
Data length
Parity bits
Stop bits
F150 Settings
Settings for Communications Specifications
Item
Baud rate
Data length
Setting
Make the same settings as for the
Programmable Controller.
Parity bits
Stop bits
Read Area
DM
Begin read word
0100
Write Area
DM
Begin write word
0105
Settings for Output Expressions
Go to Expression/Data, and make the following settings in data
0 and data 1.
Data 0: R0.JG
Data 1: R1.JG
263
Sample Ladder Program
Section 9-5
Data Area Allocations
DM 0100
DM 0101
Input Command Area
(Read Area from F150)
DM 0102
DM 0103
DM 0104
Initial value of #0000 is stored
in DM 0100
DM 0105
Results Storage Area for data output 0
DM 0106
DM 0107
DM 0108
DM 0109
DM 0110
DM 0111
DM 0112
DM 0200
DM 0201
264
Initial value of #f000 is stored in
DM 0105 (Write Flag)
Host Link Communications
Area
Results Storage Area for data output 1
Initial value of #f000 is stored in
DM 0109 (Write Flag)
Result Storage Area for
ANDW Instruction
Section 9-5
Sample Ladder Program
Ladder Diagram
00001
DIFU(13)
00100
00100
CMP(20)
DM0100
#0000
25506
MOV(21)
#0010
On the rising edge of the external switch (00001), the Programmable Controller confirms
that the Input Command Area is
cleared to 0, and writes the Run
command.
DM0100
25313
MOV(21)
DM0105
010
01015
DIFU(13)
00200
Change in Overwrite Flag for
data output 0 is detected.
DIFD(14)
00201
00200
00215
00201
00215
ANDW(34)
DM0106
#0001
DM0200
If the 1’s digit of data output 0 is
1, 00300 comes ON (=NG).
25506
00300
265
Section 9-5
Sample Ladder Program
00215
ANDW(34)
DM0110
#0001
DM0201
If the 1’s digit of data output 1 is
1, 00301 comes ON (=NG).
25506
00301
00300
00100
00315
00301
00315
266
The OR result of NG’s for data
0 and data 1 is output to 00315.
This is saved until the next
measurement.
SECTION 10
CompoBus/D Settings
This section describes the communications settings required when the F150 is used as a
CompoBus/D Slave.
CompoBus/D communications are only supported for the F150-C10E-3-DRT.
For details on the baud rate and node address settings, refer to the Setup Manual.
For detailed information relating to CompoBus/D, such as system configuration and cable
connections, refer to the CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) Operation Manual (W267).
10-1 Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-1
10-1-2
270
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirming CompoBus/D Communications
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
10-2 Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
10-2-1
10-2-2
273
Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
281
10-3 Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
10-3-1
10-3-2
10-3-3
10-3-4
10-3-5
Control Output (Word +0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Judgement Output (+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F150 Status Output (+2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expand Command Response Output (+3 to 7) . . .
Data Output in BCD or Binary
(+3 to 26 or +8 to 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
303
304
305
305
10-4 Timing Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
10-4-1
10-4-2
306
Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
312
10-5 Allocation Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6 Sample Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
318
10-6-1
10-6-2
10-6-3
10-6-4
Programmable Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocations for Programmable Controller . . . . . . .
Timing Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
318
319
321
267
Communications Settings
10-1
Section 10-1
Communications Settings
The F150-C10E-3-DRT operates as a CompoBus/D Slave. Data
is automatically exchanged with the Master Unit using remote
I/O.
Set Mode
Command inputs cannot be received.
Monitor
Mode
Command inputs can be received, but measurement results
(judgement output and data output) are not output to external
devices. Control output and F150 status output are supported,
however.
Run Mode
Both command input and output of measurement results are
supported.
268
Communications Settings
Section 10-1
Programmable Controller (Master)
Remote I/O
Communications
See the diagrams on the
next two pages for details
on the output and input
areas.
F150-C10E-3-DRT
F150-C10E-3-DRT
F150-C10E-3-DRT
269
Communications Settings
Section 10-1
Output Area
Set operational commands to be sent to the F150 here. Select
the input mode (Basic/Expand) in the communications specifications settings menu.
Basic
Word +0
Basic command (2 bytes)
Only a small number of allocated areas
are required.
Commands for measurement and scene
changing can be used.
Expand
Word +0
Word +1
Word +2
Word +3
Word +4
270
Expand
command
(10 bytes)
A variety of commands other than the
measurement command can be used,
such as parameter setting and reading
commands. Various F150’s functions can
be used.
Section 10-1
Communications Settings
Input Area
Measurement results are output from the F150 to this area.
Word +0
Control output (2 bytes)
Word +1
Judgement result output (2 bytes)
Word +2
F150 status output (2 bytes)
Word +3
Word +4
Word +5
Word +6
Expand
command
response
output
(10 bytes)
These outputs can be enabled or disabled. When the
“expand command response
output” is disabled, the data
output will be shifted up to
word +3.
Word +7
Word +8
Word +9
Word +10
to
Data output
(48 bytes)
Word +30
Word +31
10-1-1 Communications Settings
This section explains the setting methods required for communications specifications when performing communications with
the CompoBus/D.
Item
Input mode
Selections
Details
Basic
(default
setting)
Use this mode for measurement commands and
scene changing. The number of allocated areas
required in the Master in this mode is less than that
required in Expand mode (2 bytes).
Expand
In addition to measurement commands, commands
for reading and setting parameters are also
available. The number of allocated areas required in
this mode is greater than that required in Basic mode
(10 bytes).
271
Section 10-1
Communications Settings
Item
GATE terminal
control
Data output
Response output
Communications
errors (see below)
Selections
Details
Measure
output
(default setting)
The GATE terminal on the terminal block is used as
a timing signal for obtaining measurement results
output from the terminal block.
Any output
The GATE terminal on the terminal block is
controlled by commands, and used as required by
the user. (e.g.: Lighting control, etc.)
OFF
(default
setting)
Measurement results (data) are not output. There
are a fewer number of output bytes and so the
number of allocated areas can be decreased.
BCD
Measurement results (data) are output in BCD
format.
Binary
Measurement results (data) are output in binary
format.
OFF
(default
setting)
Responses to expand commands are not output.
There are a fewer number of output bytes and so the
number of allocated areas can be decreased.
However, even if commands for reading setting
values are input, the values will not be output.
Normally, if the input mode is Basic mode, this
setting should be OFF.
ON
Responses to expand commands are output. The
command code for the executed command will be
entered in the first read word. Commands that are
executed can be monitored with this word.
Keep
(default
setting)
When a network error occurs, the data that was sent
from the Programmable Controller to the F150
immediately before the error occurred (in the output
area) is saved, and the F150 continues operation
based on this data.
Clear
When a network error occurs, the data sent from the
Programmable Controller to the F150 is cleared to 0,
and the F150 continues operation based on this
data. The Command Enable Bit will also be reset to
0. Therefore, when the network error has been
cleared, if the output area of the Programmable
Controller is in the same state as it was when the
error occurred, the same command will be executed
twice.
Communications Errors
When a network error occurs, the status of data input from the
Programmable Controller to the F150 via the network may
change. Therefore, select the way the status of data input from
the Programmable Controller to the F150 is to be defined when
an error occurs.
272
Section 10-1
Communications Settings
Note Select CompoBus/D as the data output destination in SYS/Output. If RS-232C is selected, no value will be output to CompoBus/D regardless of whether BCD or binary is set for the data
output format. ® p. 155
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
2 Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT Key.
Scn 0 B MON B
---
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Freeze
3 Select SYS.
273
Communications Settings
4 Select Communications.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
5 Select CompoBus/D set.
System settings
Communications
Output RS-232C
Device settings
Normal
Display Host link
Set key operation
Terminal block
Switch menu
CompoBus/D set
Startup mode
CompoBus/D ref
Error method
Version
6 Set the required items.
274
Section 10-1
Section 10-1
Communications Settings
7 Select End.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
8 Select OK.
Note In order to register these settings it is necessary to save the settings to flash memory and restart the F150. Also, the number of
I/O bytes will change in accordance with the new settings. Therefore, restart the whole network. ® p. 179
10-1-2 Confirming CompoBus/D Communications
Settings
CompoBus/D communications settings can be confirmed by displaying them on the screen. If an error occurs in CompoBus/D
communications, take note of the contents of this screen and
contact your OMRON representative.
Details
Item
ID
Vendor ID (A), product type (B), product code
(C).
47, 0, 203
(A) (B) (C)
Rev.
DeviceNet specifications version.
Serial number
Serial number for the model. (20200001 on)
Baud rate
Baud rate set with DIP switch.
Node address
Node address set with DIP switch.
Number of input
bytes
Depends on the input mode in the
CompoBus/D settings.
2: Basic; 10: Expand
Number of output
bytes
Depends on the data outputs and response
outputs in the CompoBus/D settings.
6: Data output OFF; Response OFF
16: Data output OFF; Response ON
54: Data output BCD or binary; Response OFF
64: Data output BCD or binary; Response ON
275
Section 10-2
Input Format
Procedure
1 Select CompoBus/D ref.
System settings
Communications
Output RS-232C
Device settings
Normal
Display Host link
Set key operation
Terminal block
Switch menu
CompoBus/D set
Startup mode
CompoBus/D ref
Error method
Version
2 Select OK to exit this screen.
2.0
10-2
Input Format
This section explains the format of commands that are set in the
output area of the Programmable Controller in order to control
F150 operation.
10-2-1 Basic Mode
The word numbers given here are the offset values from the first
word in the allocated area of the Master. The “-” indicates that
either 0 or 1 can be set without affecting the setting.
ONE MEASUREMENT
When bit 8 turns ON, one measurement is executed.
276
Section 10-2
Input Format
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
0000
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
--001
0000
3 to 0
----
Bit 8: one
measurement
CONTINUOUS MEASUREMENT
Starts continuous measurement. Measurements are continued
until the STOP MEASUREMENT is input. To input other commands, input the STOP MEASUREMENT command. If other
commands are input while continuous measurement is being
executed, continuous measurement will be stopped temporarily
and start up again once processing for the input command has
been completed.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
0000
11 to 8
--000
Setting
7 to 4
1001
3 to 0
----
Bit 4: Start continuous
measurement
Bit 7: Command Enable
Bit
After the command has been input, set bit 7 to 0 to start measurement.
STOP MEASUREMENT
Stops continuous measurement.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
0000
11 to 8
--000
Setting
7 to 4
1000
3 to 0
----
Bit 4: Stops continuous
measurement
Bit 7: Command Enable
Bit
SWITCH SCENE
Switches to a specified scene number.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
0000
11 to 8
--000
Setting
7 to 4
1010
3 to 0
Scene
number
Bit 5: Switch scene
Bit 7: Command Enable
Bit
Specify a number in the range 0
to 15 in binary format.
277
Section 10-2
Input Format
MODEL REGISTER
Re-registers the model based on the currently displayed image.
(With through display, re-registers the model based on the measurement image input immediately before.) Only valid when the
measurement method for the specified region is gray search or
precise search. If other regions are specified, this command will
be ignored.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
0000
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
--000
1100
3 to 0
Region
No.
Bit 6: Register model
Bit 7: Command Enable
Bit
Specify a number in the range 0
to 15 in binary format.
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, since this
command registers the image currently displayed, display the
region for the desired Camera before execution. Use the Up/
Down Console Keys to switch Camera images.
Two-camera
Operation
GATE TERMINAL OUTPUT CONTROL
When “any output” has been selected for GATE terminal control
in the communications specifications setting menu, bit 11 will
control the GATE terminal. If the GATE terminal is used for measurement output, the status of bit 11 will be ignored.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
Output area
----
11 to 8
*--0--
Word +0, bit 11
GATE terminal
Input area
278
Word +0, bit 11
Setting
7 to 4
----
3 to 0
----
Bit 11: GATE terminal
control
Section 10-2
Input Format
Area
Bits
Function
OUT
Bit 11
Controls the output from the user terminal (GATE terminal).
IN
TERMSTAT
The status of the GATE terminal will be reflected by the status
of word +0, bit 11 of the input area (TERMSTAT). Therefore,
the status of the GATE terminal can be obtained by
monitoring this bit. There will be a time lag before changes in
bit 11 of the output area are reflected in the GATE terminal
due to DeviceNet communications delays and the status of
the F150.
RESET
Resets the F150.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
0000
11 to 8
--010
Setting
7 to 4
0000
3 to 0
0000
Bit 9: system reset
10-2-2 Expand Mode
Commands that Control F150 Operation
The following commands control F150 operation.
Command code
Function
Page
0010
Executes one measurement.
281
0011
Starts continuous measurement.
281
0012
Stops continuous measurement.
281
0020
Changes to a specified scene number.
282
0021
Increases the displayed scene number
by one.
282
0022
Decreases the displayed scene number
by one.
282
0040
Registers the model.
283
0066
Saves all data to flash memory.
283
0092
Resets the F150.
283
Commands that Read Measurement Results
The following commands read the results of the most recent
measurement.
Command code
Function
Page
0080
Reads measurement results of the
measurement region.
283
1210
Reads distances scrolled for position
displacement compensation.
294
1220
Reads calculation results for judgement
output expressions.
297
1221
Reads calculation results for data output
expressions.
297
279
Section 10-2
Input Format
Commands that Read Current Settings
The following commands read settings such as evaluation criteria. F150 operation can be controlled from the Master while monitoring F150 settings.
Command code
Function
Page
0023
Reads number of currently displayed
scene.
282
1070
Reads parameters for measurement
region.
291
1110
Reads evaluation criteria for judgement
output expressions.
292
1130
Reads light level of Intelligent Light
Source.
293
Commands that Change F150 Settings
The following commands perform settings such as for evaluation
criteria. F150 operation can be controlled from the Master while
monitoring F150 settings.
Command code
Function
Page
1060
Sets parameters for measurement
region.
287
1100
Sets evaluation criteria for judgement
output expressions.
292
1120
Sets light level of Intelligent Light
Source.
293
Commands that Control User Terminal (GATE) Output
Command code
Function
Page
1300
Turns user terminal (GATE) output
ON/OFF.
298
1301
Reads the status of the user terminal
(GATE).
299
Format
The word numbers given here are the offset values from the first
word in the allocated area of the Master. “-” indicates that either 0
or 1 can be entered without affecting the setting. Commands are
set in words +0 to +4. Word +0, bit 15 is a command trigger. Commands are executed when the status of this bit changes (0 « 1).
Response
If the response output has been set to ON in the communications
specifications settings menu, a response will be output from the
F150 when a command has been completed. For commands
that are given here without responses, the content of the
280
Section 10-2
Input Format
response that is output in words +3 to +7 will be the same as for
the commands in +0 to +4.
Example: for measurement (0010) commands.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0001
3 to 0
0000
Command code
All the bits in words +1 to +4 set to 0.
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*000
0000
0001
0000
Command code
+4
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
+5
0000
0000
0000
0000
+6
0000
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0000
0000
0010: ONE MEASUREMENT
Executes one measurement of the camera image.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0001
3 to 0
0000
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
0011: CONTINUOUS MEASUREMENT
Starts continuous measurement.
To input other commands, input the STOP MEASUREMENT
command. If other commands are input while continuous measurement is being executed, continuous measurement will be
stopped temporarily and started up again once processing for
the input command has been completed.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0001
3 to 0
0001
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
0012: STOP MEASUREMENT
Stops continuous measurement.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0001
3 to 0
0010
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
281
Section 10-2
Input Format
0020: SWITCH SCENE
Switches to a specified scene number.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*000
0000
0010
0000
Command code
+1
----
----
10’s digit
1’s digit
Scene No. (00 to 15)
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
0021: INCREMENT SCENE
Increments the current scene number.
If the current scene number is 15, switches to scene 0.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0010
3 to 0
0001
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
0022: DECREMENT SCENE
Decrements the current scene number.
If the current scene number is 0, switches to scene 15.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0010
3 to 0
0010
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
0023: READ SCENE NUMBER
Reads the scene number of the image being displayed.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0010
3 to 0
0011
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*000
0000
0001
0011
Command code
+4
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
+5
0000
0000
10’s digit
1’s digit
Scene No. (00 to 15)
+6
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
+7
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
282
Section 10-2
Input Format
0040: MODEL REGISTER
Re-registers the model based on the currently displayed image.
(With through display, re-registers the model based on the measurement image input immediately before.) Only valid when the
measurement method for the specified region is gray search or
precise search. If any other regions are specified the command
will be ignored.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
+1
----
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
0000
0100
0000
Command code
----
10’s digit
1’s digit
Region No. (00 to 15)
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
If the camera mode is Two-camera Switching mode, since this
command registers the image currently displayed, display the
region for the desired Camera before execution. Use the Up/
Down Console Keys to switch Camera images.
Two-camera
Operation
0066: SAVE DATA
Saves all data to flash memory.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
0000
0110
3 to 0
0110
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
0092: RESET
Resets the F150.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
0000
1001
3 to 0
0010
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
0080: READ MEASUREMENT
Reads measurement results for the region measured last.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*000
0000
1000
0000
Command code
+1
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (00 to 15)
Data type (00 to 13)
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
283
Section 10-2
Input Format
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*000
0000
1000
0000
Command code
+4
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (00 to 15)
+5
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion.
+6
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign.
+7
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Sign:
Data type (00 to 13)
Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
Data Types
The data types that can be read will vary according to the measurement method for the specified region.
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity
and Axis Angle
Meaning
Parameter
284
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
X coordinate of measured center of gravity
02
Y coordinate of measured center of gravity
03
X coordinate of reference center of gravity
04
Y coordinate of reference center of gravity
05
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference X coordinate of center of
gravity)
06
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference Y coordinate of center of
gravity)
07
Measured value for area
08
Reference value for area
09
Difference between reference and measured area
10
Inverted area (area of measurement region -- measured
area)
11
Measured axis angle
12
Reference axis angle
13
Axis displacement (measured axis angle -- reference
axis angle)
Section 10-2
Input Format
Note Parameters 11 to 13 are only used when measurement method
is binary center of gravity and axis angle.
Gray Edge Position
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured edge coordinate
02
Reference edge coordinate
03
Displacement (measured coordinate -- reference
coordinate)
Surface Defect
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured defect
02
Maximum density value
03
Minimum density value
Density Averaging
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured average density
02
Reference average density
03
Difference between measured average density and
reference average density
Gray Search, Precise Search
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured X coordinate
02
Measured Y coordinate
03
Reference X coordinate
04
Reference Y coordinate
05
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate -reference X coordinate)
06
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate -reference Y coordinate)
07
Correlation value
285
Section 10-2
Input Format
Edge Pitch
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Number of detected objects
02
Average pitch
03
Maximum pitch
04
Minimum pitch
05
Average width
06
Maximum width
07
Minimum width
Relative Search
Parameter
286
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured X width
02
Measured Y width
03
Measured distance
04
Reference X width
05
Reference Y width
06
Reference distance
07
Difference in X widths (measured width -- reference
width)
08
Difference in Y widths (measured width -- reference
width)
09
Difference in distances (measured distance -- reference
distance)
10
Correlation with model 0
11
Correlation with model 1
Section 10-2
Input Format
1060: SET PARAMETER
Sets parameters for measurement regions.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0000
0110
0000
Command code
+1
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (00 to 15)
+2
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
setting data.
+3
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
setting data and sign.
+4
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion of
setting data.
Data type (00 to 14)
Data Types
The data types that can be set will vary according to the measurement method for the specified region.
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity
and Axis Angle
Parameter
Meaning
00
Upper limit of X coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
01
Lower limit of X coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
02
Upper limit of Y coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
03
Lower limit of Y coordinate of center of gravity
(--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
04
Upper limit of area (0 to 9,999,999.999)
05
Lower limit of area (0 to 9,999,999.999)
06
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
07
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
08
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
09
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
10
Upper limit of binary level (0 to 255)
11
Lower limit of binary level (0 to 255)
12
Binary level inversion (0: not inverted, 1: inverted)
13
Upper limit of axis angle (--180.000 to 180.000)
14
Lower limit of axis angle (--180.000 to 180.000)
Note Parameters 13 and 14 are only used when the measurement
method is binary center of gravity and axis angle.
287
Section 10-2
Input Format
Gray Edge Position
Parameter
Meaning
00
Upper limit of position (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
01
Lower limit of position (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
02
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
03
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
04
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
05
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
06
Edge search direction (-: 0, ¯: 1, ®: 2, ¬: 3)
07
Edge color (Light ® Dark: 0, Dark ® Light: 1)
08
Level (0 to 100)
Gray Search, Precise Search
Parameter
288
Meaning
00
Upper limit of X coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
01
Lower limit of X coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
02
Upper limit of Y coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
03
Lower limit of Y coordinate (--9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
04
Upper limit of correlation value (0 to 100)
05
Lower limit of correlation value (0 to 100)
06
Upper-left X coordinate of search region (0 to 511)
07
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region (0 to 483)
08
Lower-right X coordinate of search region (0 to 511)
09
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region (0 to 483)
10
X coordinate of reference position (0 to 511)
11
Y coordinate of reference position (0 to 483)
12
Search speed (0: LOW ® 1 ® 2 ® 3 ® 4: HIGH)
Section 10-2
Input Format
Edge Pitch
Parameter
Meaning
00
Upper limit of number of objects (0 to 255)
01
Lower limit of number of objects (0 to 255)
02
Upper limit of pitch (0 to 9,999.999)
03
Lower limit of pitch (0 to 9,999.999)
04
Upper limit of width (0 to 9,999.999)
05
Lower limit of width (0 to 9,999.999)
06
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
07
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
08
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
09
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
10
Counted object color (White: 0, Black: 1)
11
Edge level (0 to 100)
12
Minimum level (0 to 255)
Density Averaging
Parameter
Meaning
00
Upper limit of average density (0.000 to 255.000)
01
Lower limit of average density (0.000 to 255.000)
02
Upper-left X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
03
Upper-left Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
04
Lower-right X coordinate of region (0 to 511)
05
Lower-right Y coordinate of region (0 to 483)
289
Section 10-2
Input Format
Relative Search
Parameter
290
Meaning
00
Upper limit of width X (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
01
Lower limit of width X (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
02
Upper limit of width Y (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
03
Lower limit of width Y (--9999.999 to 9999.999)
04
Upper limit of distance (0 to 9999.999)
05
Lower limit of distance (0 to 9999.999)
06
Upper limit of correlation with model 0 (0 to 100)
07
Lower limit of correlation with model 0 (0 to 100)
08
Upper limit of correlation with model 1 (0 to 100)
09
Lower limit of correlation with model 1 (0 to 100)
10
Upper-left X coordinate of search region for model 0 (0
to 511)
11
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region for model 0 (0
to 483)
12
Lower-right X coordinate of search region for model 0
(0 to 511)
13
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region for model 0
(0 to 483)
14
Upper-left X coordinate of search region for model 1 (0
to 511)
15
Upper-left Y coordinate of search region for model 1 (0
to 483)
16
Lower-right X coordinate of search region for model 1
(0 to 511)
17
Lower-right Y coordinate of search region for model 1
(0 to 483)
18
X coordinate of reference position for model 0 (0 to
511)
19
Y coordinate of reference position for model 0 (0 to
483)
20
X coordinate of reference position for model 1 (0 to
511)
21
Y coordinate of reference position for model 1 (0 to
483)
22
Search speed (0: LOW ® 1 ® 2 ® 3 ® 4: HIGH)
Section 10-2
Input Format
Surface Defect
Parameter
Meaning
00
Defect (0 to 255)
01
Upper limit of density value (0 to 255)
02
Lower limit of density value (0 to 255)
03
Element size (4 to 80)
04
Compare pitch (1 to 6)
05 to 10
See note
Note The meanings of parameters 5 to 10 vary according to the shape
of the region.
Parameter
Box
Line
Circumference
Arc
05
Upper-left X
coordinate of
region (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
start point (0 to
511)
X coordinate of
center (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
center (0 to 511)
06
Upper-left Y
coordinate of
region (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
start point (0 to
483)
Y coordinate of
center (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
center (0 to 483)
07
Lower-right X
coordinate of
region (0 to 511)
X coordinate of
end point (0 to
511)
Radius (1 to 512)
Radius (1 to 512)
08
Lower-right Y
coordinate of
region (0 to 483)
Y coordinate of
end point (0 to
483)
Width (1 to 64)
Width (1 to 64)
09
---
Width (1 to 64)
---
Start angle
(--180.00 to
180.00)
10
---
---
---
End angle
(--180.00 to
180.00)
1070: READ PARAMETER
Reads parameters for measurement regions. The data types are
the same as for command 1060. Refer to the parameter listed
above.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0000
0111
0000
Command code
+1
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (00 to 15)
Data type (00 to 14)
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
291
Section 10-2
Input Format
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*001
0000
0111
0000
Command code
+4
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (00 to 15)
+5
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 3 digits of
integral portion.
+6
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign.
+7
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Sign:
Data type (00 to 14)
Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
1100: SET JUDGEMENT OUTPUT EXPRESSION CRITERIA
Sets evaluation criteria for judgement output expressions.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0001
0000
0000
Command code
+1
0000
Type
10’s digit
1’s digit
Judgement number (00
to 15) and type
+2
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
+3
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign
+4
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Type:
Sign:
Upper limit: 0000, Lower limit: 0001
Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
1110: READ JUDGEMENT OUTPUT EXPRESSION CRITERIA
Reads evaluation criteria for judgement output expressions.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0001
0001
0000
Command code
+1
0000
Type
10’s digit
of judgement
number
1’s digit of
judgement
number
Judgement number (00
to 15) and type
Type: Upper limit: 0000, Lower limit: 0001
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
292
Section 10-2
Input Format
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*001
0001
0001
0000
Command code
+4
0000
Type
10’s digit
of judgement
number
1’s digit of
judgement
number
Judgement number (00
to 15) and type
Write Verification Flag
+5
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
+6
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign.
+7
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Sign:
Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
1120: SET LIGHT LEVEL
Sets the light level for the Intelligent Light Source.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0001
0010
0000
Command code
+1
0000
0000
0000
Camera
number
Camera number (0 to
1)
+2
Light level
for
section B
Light level
for
section C
Light level
for
section D
Light level
for
section E
Light level for each
section
+3
0000
0000
0000
Light level
for
section A
+4
0000
Light level
for
section F
Light level
for
section G
Light level
for
section H
F150-LTC20
(0 to 7; 0 = unlit)
F150-LTC50
F to H always set to 0
1130: READ LIGHT LEVEL
Reads the light level for the Intelligent Light Source. For details of
the positions of the sections, refer to 1120: SET LIGHT LEVEL.
293
Section 10-2
Input Format
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0001
0011
0000
Command code
+1
0000
0000
0000
Camera
number
Camera number (0 or
1)
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0001
0011
0000
Command code
+1
Light level
for
section B
Light level
for
section C
Light level
for
section D
Light level
for
section E
Light level for each
section
+2
0000
0000
0000
Light level
for
section A
+3
0000
Light level
for
section F
Light level
for
section G
Light level
for
section H
(0 to 7; 0 = unlit)
1210: READ POSITION
Reads measurement values related to position displacement
compensation for most recent measurement.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0010
0001
0000
Command code
+1
10’s digit
of region
number
1’s digit of
region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (0 to 1; to
read displacement: 2)
Data type (00 to 13)
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
Two-camera
Operation
294
If two cameras are used, specify 0 or 1 (for Position compensation 0), or 10 or 11 (for Position compensation 1) for the region
number. To read the displacement, specify 2 (for Position compensation 0) or 12 (for Position compensation 1).
Section 10-2
Input Format
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*001
0010
0001
0000
Command code
+4
0000
Region
number
10’s digit
of data
type
1’s digit of
data type
Region No. (0 to 1; to
read displacement: 2)
+5
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion
+6
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion and
sign
+7
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Sign:
Data type (00 to 13)
Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
Data Types
The data types that can be read will vary according to the measurement method for the specified region.
Gray Edge Position
Meaning
Parameter
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured edge coordinate
02
Reference edge coordinate
03
Displacement (measured coordinate -- reference
coordinate)
Position Displacement
Parameter
Meaning
00
Displacement in X direction (reference X coordinate -measured X coordinate)
01
Displacement in Y direction (reference Y coordinate -measured Y coordinate)
02
Angle displacement (reference angle -- measured
angle)
295
Section 10-2
Input Format
Binary Center of Gravity and Area, Binary Center of Gravity
and Axis Angle
Parameter
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
X coordinate of measured center of gravity
02
Y coordinate of measured center of gravity
03
X coordinate of reference center of gravity
04
Y coordinate of reference center of gravity
05
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference X coordinate of center of
gravity)
06
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate of
center of gravity -- reference Y coordinate of center of
gravity)
07
Measured value for area
08
Reference value for area
09
Difference between reference and measured area
10
Inverted area (area of measurement region -- measured
area)
11
Measured axis angle
12
Reference axis angle
13
Axis displacement (measured axis angle -- reference
axis angle)
Note Parameters 11 to 13 are only used when measurement method
is binary center of gravity and axis angle.
Gray Search
Parameter
296
Meaning
00
Judgement result (0: OK, --1: NG, --2: no measurement)
01
Measured X coordinate
02
Measured Y coordinate
03
Reference X coordinate
04
Reference Y coordinate
05
Displacement in X direction (measured X coordinate -reference X coordinate)
06
Displacement in Y direction (measured Y coordinate -reference Y coordinate)
07
Correlation value
Section 10-2
Input Format
1220: READ JUDGEMENT OUTPUT EXPRESSION RESULT
Reads calculation results of judgement output expressions for
the most recent measurement.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0010
0010
0000
Command code
+1
0000
0000
10’s digit
1’s digit
Judgement number (00
to 15)
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*001
0010
0010
0000
Command code
+4
0000
0000
10’s digit
1’s digit
Judgement number (00
to 15)
+5
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion of
calculation result
+6
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion of
calculation result and
sign
+7
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Sign:
Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
1221: READ DATA OUTPUT EXPRESSION RESULT
Reads calculation results of data output expressions for the most
recent measurement.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+0
*001
0010
0010
0001
Command code
+1
0000
0000
0000
1’s digit
Data number (0 to 7)
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
297
Section 10-2
Input Format
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*001
0010
0010
0001
Command code
+4
0000
0000
0000
1’s digit
Data number (0 to 7)
+5
1,000’s
digit
100’s digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits of
integral portion of
calculation result
+6
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits of
integral portion of
calculation result and
sign
+7
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion
Sign:
Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
1300: GATE TERMINAL OUTPUT CONTROL
Changes the output of the user terminal (GATE terminal). This
setting is only valid if GATE terminal control has been set to user
output in the communications specifications setting menu.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*001
+1
0000
Output area
11 to 8
0011
Setting
7 to 4
0000
3 to 0
0000
0000
0000
ON/OFF
Set all bits in words +2 to +4 to 0.
ON/OFF: ON (0001), OFF (0000)
Command code
Terminal output control
Word +0 to +4
Command setting
GATE terminal
Input area
Area
Word +0, bit 11
Bits
Function
OUT
Word +0 to +1
Sets the command (ON/OFF).
IN
TERMSTAT
The status of the GATE terminal will be reflected by the
status of word +0, bit 11 of the input area (TERMSTAT).
Therefore, the status of the GATE terminal can be
monitored with this bit. There will be a time lag before
changes in bit 11 of the output area due to DeviceNet
communications delays and the status of the F150.
298
Section 10-3
Output Format
1301: READ GATE TERMINAL STATUS
Reads the status of the user terminal (GATE terminal). This setting is only valid if GATE terminal control has been set to user
output in the communications specifications setting menu.
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*001
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
0011
0000
3 to 0
0001
Command code
Set all bits in words +1 to +4 to 0.
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*001
0011
0000
0001
Command code
+4
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
+5
0000
0000
0000
ON/OFF
ON/OFF status of
terminal
+6
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
+7
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
ON/OFF:
10-3
ON (0001), OFF (0000)
Output Format
The following explains the contents of output from the F150 to
the input area of the Programmable Controller. Data output and
response output settings can be made in the communications
specifications setting menu. The number of bytes will vary
according to these settings as shown below.
Data Output: OFF; Response Output: OFF
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
+0
Control output
+1
Judgement output
+2
F150 status output
Bytes
7 to 4
3 to 0
6 bytes
299
Section 10-3
Output Format
Data Output: OFF; Response Output: ON
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Bytes
7 to 4
3 to 0
16 bytes
+0
Control output
+1
Judgement output
+2
F150 status output
+3
Expand command response output
+4
+5
+6
+7
Data Output: BCD/Binary; Response Output: OFF
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Bytes
7 to 4
3 to 0
54 bytes
+0
Control output
+1
Judgement output
+2
F150 status output
+3 to +26
Data output (BCD/binary)
Data Output: ON; Response Output: ON
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Bytes
7 to 4
+0
Control output
+1
Judgement output
+2
F150 status output
+3
Expand command response output
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8 to +31
300
Data output (BCD/binary)
3 to 0
64 bytes
Section 10-3
Output Format
10-3-1 Control Output (Word +0)
Flag
Bits
Function
0
ERROR
Turns ON if an error is generated during F150
processing. Turns ON/OFF in synchronization with
the ERR terminal on the terminal block.
1
RUN
ON while the F150 is in Run mode. Turns ON/OFF
in synchronization with the RUN terminal on the
terminal block.
2
BUSY
Indicates that the F150 is executing a command
from CompoBus/D. Do not input a command while
the BUSY Flag is ON. The currently executed
command or the input command will not be
executed properly.
When commands are from RS-232C, or when
using a STEP signal from a terminal board, this
output will not turn ON. When inputting in this way,
use the BUSY signal on the terminal board.
3
Empty
(Always 0)
4
OR
Outputs an overall judgement when a
measurement command has been executed. If
there is one NG in the specified measurement
region or the output expressions, the overall
judgement will be NG.
Select whether to turn ON this output for OK or NG
in the output polarity setting in
SYS/Communications/Terminal block. (The
default setting is ON for NG.) ® p. 182
5 to 7
Empty
(Always 0)
8
JDGFLG
Alternates between 0 and 1 to indicate that
judgement output has been refreshed.
9
DATAFLG
Alternates between 0 and 1 to indicate that data
output has been refreshed.
10
CMDFLG (see
note)
Alternates between 0 and 1 to indicate that expand
command response output has been refreshed. Do
not change the contents of an expand command
until this flag has changed status. By comparing
the Expand Command Bit and the Response
Output Bit when the flag changes status, it is
possible to verify whether the input command and
the executed command correspond.
11
TERMSTAT
Indicates the current status of the GATE terminal.
Only output when the GATE terminal control is set
to any output.
12
CMDSTAT (see
note)
Indicates expand command errors (wrong format,
etc.). When an error occurs, this flag turns ON and
expand command response is not output. The
CMDFLG will change accordingly.
13 to 15
Empty
(Always 0)
301
Section 10-3
Output Format
Note CMDFLG and CMDSTAT are only valid when the input mode is
Expand mode.
10-3-2 Judgement Output (+1)
When measurement commands are executed, the judgements
and calculation results set in Expression/Judge are output.
Select whether a bit is turned ON by an OK or an NG judgement,
in the output polarity setting in SYS/Communications/Terminal
block. (The default setting is for the bit to turn ON for an NG
judgement.) ® p. 182
Bits
302
Allocation
0
Judgement output 0
1
Judgement output 1
2
Judgement output 2
3
Judgement output 3
4
Judgement output 4
5
Judgement output 5
6
Judgement output 6
7
Judgement output 7
8
Judgement output 8
9
Judgement output 9
10
Judgement output 10
11
Judgement output 11
12
Judgement output 12
13
Judgement output 13
14
Judgement output 14
15
Judgement output 15
Section 10-3
Output Format
10-3-3 F150 Status Output (+2)
Bits
Allocation
0 to 3
Number of currently displayed scene (refreshed when
the Switch Scene command is executed)
4 to 7
Empty (always 0)
8 (see
note)
Continuous Measurement Start Flag
9 (see
note)
Continuous Measurement Stop Flag
10 (see
note)
Switch Scene Completed Flag
11 (see
note)
Model Register Completed Flag
12 (see
note)
One Measurement Completed Flag
13 to 15
Empty (always 0)
Note Bits 8 to 12 above are only valid when the input mode is Basic
mode.
When a command has been executed, the corresponding flag
will turn ON. Wait for the flag to turn ON, and turn OFF the command. When the command is turned OFF, the corresponding flag
will also turn OFF. For details refer to the relevant timing chart.
10-3-4 Expand Command Response Output (+3 to 7)
After an expand command has been executed, a response is
output. For details of responses to given commands refer to 10-2
Input Format.
Since these words are allocated for expand command output, if
the input mode is Basic mode, the output will always be 0.
Accordingly, if the input mode is set to Basic mode, turn the
response output OFF.
Example: 0023: Read Scene Number
Bits
Word
15 to 12
+0
*000
11 to 8
0000
Setting
7 to 4
0010
3 to 0
0011
Command code
Set words +1 to +4 OFF.
303
Section 10-3
Output Format
Response
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
*000
0000
0010
0011
Command code
+4
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
+5
0000
0000
10’s digit
1’s digit
Scene number (00 to
15)
+6
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
+7
0000
0000
0000
0000
All 0
Note For commands that are given here without responses, the content of the response that is output in words +3 to +7 will be the
same as for the commands in +0 to +4.
10-3-5 Data Output in BCD or Binary (+3 to 26 or +8 to
31)
When measurement commands are executed, the results of calculations set in Expression/Data are output. The range for output values is --9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999 (after calibration).
If expand command response output is OFF, the results are output to words +3 to +26, and if it is ON, the results are output to
words +8 to +31.
304
Section 10-3
Output Format
BCD Code
Word
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
+8
1,000’s
digit
100’s
digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits
of integral portion
of data 0
(decimal)
+4
+9
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits
of of integral
portion of data 0
(decimal) and sign
+5
+10
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion of
data 0 (decimal)
+6
+11
1,000’s
digit
100’s
digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits
of integral portion
of data 1
(decimal)
+7
+12
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits
of of integral
portion of data 1
(decimal) and sign
+8
+13
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion of
data 1 (decimal)
to
to
3 + (3 ´
n) + 0
8 + (3 ´
n) + 0
1,000’s
digit
100’s
digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits
of integral portion
of data n
(decimal)
3 + (3 ´
n) + 1
8 + (3 ´
n) + 1
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits
of of integral
portion of data n
(decimal) and sign
3 + (3 ´
n) + 2
8 + (3 ´
n) + 2
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion of
data n (decimal)
to
to
+24
+29
1,000’s
digit
100’s
digit
10’s digit
1’s digit
Rightmost 4 digits
of integral portion
of data 7
(decimal)
+25
+30
Sign
1,000,000
’s digit
100,000’s
digit
10,000’s
digit
Leftmost 3 digits
of of integral
portion of data 7
(decimal) and sign
+26
+31
0000
1st
decimal
2nd
decimal
3rd
decimal
Decimal portion of
data 7 (decimal)
Sign: Positive: 0000, Negative: 1111
Values for output numbers which are not set will be 0.
305
Section 10-3
Output Format
The binary 2’s complement of the calculation results after multiplication by a factor of 1,000 are output. The output values are
restricted to the range of values whose 2’s complement can be
expressed in 6 bytes.
Binary
Code
Word
Bits
Word
15 to 12
11 to 8
Setting
7 to 4
3 to 0
+3
+8
Binary data
First 2 bytes of
data 0.
+4
+9
Binary data
Middle 2 bytes of
data 0.
+5
+10
Binary data
Last 2 bytes of
data 0.
+6
+11
Binary data
First 2 bytes of
data 1.
+7
+12
Binary data
Middle 2 bytes of
data 1.
+8
+13
Binary data
Last 2 bytes of
data 1.
to
to
3 + (3 ´
n) + 0
8 + (3 ´
n) + 0
Binary data
First 2 bytes of
data n.
3 + (3 ´
n) + 1
8 + (3 ´
n) + 1
Binary data
Middle 2 bytes of
data n.
3 + (3 ´
n) + 2
8 + (3 ´
n) + 2
Binary data
Last 2 bytes of
data n.
to
to
+24
+29
Binary data
First 2 bytes of
data 10.
+25
+30
Binary data
Middle 2 bytes of
data 10.
+26
+31
Binary data
Last 2 bytes of
data 10.
Values for output numbers which are not set will be 0.
306
Section 10-4
Timing Charts
10-4
Timing Charts
The meanings of the arrows and dotted lines used in this section
are as follows:
The F150 is controlled automatically according to the
status of the bit at the base of the arrow.
Perform ON/OFF control according to the status of
the bit at the base of the arrow.
Dotted lines indicate optional output. By deselecting
outputs, the number of bytes can be reduced.
10-4-1 Basic Mode
One Measurement
Output area
Word +0, bit 8
One Measurement
Word +2, bit 12
Measurement
One Measurement
Completed Flag
Word +0, bit 2
Word +0, bit 4
Input area
Word +1, all bits
Judgement output
Word +0, bit 8
Word +3 to +26
Data output
Word +0, bit 9
Note There is no expand command response output and the words
allocated for this output will always be 0. The setting for response
307
Section 10-4
Timing Charts
output in the Communications Specifications Screen should be
turned OFF before inputting a command.
Continuous Measurement
Output area
Word +0, bit 4
Start Continuous
Measurement
Word +0, bit 7
Command
Enable Bit
Word +2, bit 8
Continuous
Measurement Start Flag
Word +2, bit 9
Measurement
Measurement
Measurement
Continuous Measurement Stop Flag
Word +0, bit 2
Input area
Word +0, bit 4
Word +1, all bits
Judgement output
Word +0, bit 8
Word +3 to +26
Data output
Word +0, bit 9
Note There is no expand command response output and the words
allocated for this output will always be 0. The setting for response
output in the Communications Specifications Screen should be
turned OFF before inputting a command.
308
Section 10-4
Timing Charts
Switching Scenes
Word +0, bit 0 to 3
Scene number
Output area
Word +0, bit 5
Switch Scene
Word +0, bit 7
Command
Enable Bit
Word +2, bit 10
Switch
Scene
Completed Flag
Input area
Command
executed
Word +0, bit 2
Word +2, bit 0 to 3
Currently displayed
scene number
Re-registering the Model
Word +0, bit 0 to 3
Region number
Output area
Word +0, bit 6
Model Register
Word +0, bit 7
Command
Enable Bit
Word +2, bit 10
Input area
Model Register
Completed Flag
Command
executed
Word +0, bit 2
309
Section 10-4
Timing Charts
10-4-2 Expand Mode
One Measurement (0010)
Word +0 to +4
Output area
Command setting
Word +0, bit 15
Execution trigger
Command
executed
Next command can be
received
Word +0, bit 10
Word +3 to +7
Expand command
response output
Word +0, bit 2
Word +0, bit 4
Input area
Word +1, all bits
Judgement output
Word +0, bit 8
Word +3 to +26
Data output
Word +0, bit 9
Note Word +2 of Input Area (F150 Status Output)
The first 4 bits of this word are used to output the number of the
currently displayed scene. All other bits are for responses in
Basic mode, and therefore will always be output as 0.
310
Section 10-4
Timing Charts
Continuous Measurement (Start: 0011; Stop: 0012)
Output area
Word +0 to +4
Command setting
(Start)
(Stop)
Word +0, bit 15
Execution trigger
Measurement
Measurement
Measurement
Word +0, bit 2
Word +0, bit 10
Word +3 to +7
Expand command
response output
Word +0, bit 4
Input area
Word +1, all bits
Judgement output
Word +0, bit 8
Word +3 to +26
Data output
Word +0, bit 9
Note Word +2 of Input Area (F150 Status Output)
The first 4 bits of this word are used to output the number of the
currently displayed scene. All other bits are for responses in
Basic mode, and therefore will always be output as 0.
311
Section 10-4
Timing Charts
Commands for Reading Values (e.g. 0023 READ SCENE NUMBER)
Set the response output setting in the communications specifications settings menu to ON.
Word +0 to +4
Output area
Command setting
Word +0, bit 15
Execution trigger
Command
executed
Next command can be
received
Word +0, bit 10
Input area
Word +3 to +7
Expand command
response output
Word +0, bit 2
Note Word +2 of Input Area (F150 Status Output)
The first 4 bits of this word are used to output the number of the
currently displayed scene. All other bits are for responses in
Basic mode, and therefore will always be output as 0.
312
Section 10-5
Allocation Charts
Commands that Control F150 Operation (e.g. 0020 SWITCH SCENE)
Word +0 to +4
Output area
Command setting
Word +0, bit 15
Execution trigger
Command
execution
Word +0, bit 10
Next command can be
received
Input area
Word +0, bit 2
Note Word +2 of Input Area (F150 Status Output)
The first 4 bits of this word are used to output the number of the
currently displayed scene. All other bits are for responses in
Basic mode, and therefore will always be output as 0.
10-5
Allocation Charts
This section gives lists of allocations for the input and output area
of the Programmable Controller. For details refer to Input Format
and Output Format.
313
Section 10-5
Allocation Charts
Output Area
For details refer to Input Format. ® p. 276
Basic Mode
Bits
Word +0
Scene number/region number
0
1
2
3
4
Continuous Measurement
5
Scene Switch
6
Model Register
7
Enable Bit
8
One Measurement
9
Reset
10
Empty
11
GATE Terminal
12
Empty
13
14
15
Expand Mode
BIts
0
1
Word +0
Command
code
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
314
Execution
trigger
Word +1
Parameter
Word +2
Word +3
Word +4
Section 10-5
Allocation Charts
Input Area
For details refer to Output Format. ® p. 299
Bits
Word +0
0
ERROR
1
RUN
2
BUSY
3
Empty
4
OR
5
Empty
6
Word +1
Word +2
Word +3 to
Word +7
Word +8 to
Word +31
Judgement
for expression set in
Expression/
Judge.
(Judgement
0: bit 0:
...Judgement
15: bit 15)
Number of
currently displayed scene
Expand command
responses
(see note 1)
Calculation
results for
expressions
set in
Expression/
Judge.
(If the expand
command
responses
are all set to
OFF, these
calculation
results will be
output to
words +3 to
+26.)
Empty
7
8
JDGFLG
Continuous
Measurement
Start Flag
(see note 2)
9
DATAFLG
Continuous
Measurement
Stop Flag
(see note 2)
10
CMDFLG
(see note 1)
Switch Scene
Completed
Flag (see
note 2)
11
TERMSTAT
Model Register Completed Flag
(see note 2)
12
CMDSTAT
(see note 1)
One Measurement
Completed
Flag (see
note 2)
13
Empty
Empty
14
15
Note
1. These bits are only valid if the input mode is Expand mode.
(If the input mode is Basic mode these bits will always be 0.)
2. These flags are only valid if the input mode is Basic mode. (If
the input mode is Expand mode these bits will always be 0.)
315
Section 10-6
Sample Ladder Program
10-6
Sample Ladder Program
This section gives a sample ladder program for the OMRON
CVM1 Programmable Controller.
In this program, the scene is switched to scene 15 at power ON
and one measurement is performed. The judgement for this
measurement is then output back to the Programmable Controller.
10-6-1 Programmable Controller Settings
Node Address
Set the DIP switch to “2.”
Settings Communications Specifications
Item
Setting
Bytes
Input mode
Basic
2 input bytes
Data output
OFF
6 output bytes
Response output
OFF
Setting Expressions
Set the data 0 in Expression/Data to “R0.JG.”
Setting Output Destinations
Select CompoBus/D as the output destination for data in SYS/
Output.
10-6-2 Allocations for Programmable Controller
Word
316
Allocation
1902
Command input area. (Programmable Controller ® F150)
2002
BUSY signal is allocated to bit 2 of this word.
2003
Judgement output area. (F150 ® Programmable Controller)
2004
Response for the command input in word 1902 is allocated
to the bits in this word.
Section 10-6
Sample Ladder Program
10-6-3 Timing Charts
Scene Switching
Word 1902, bit 0 to 3
Scene number (15)
Word 1902, bit 5
Switch Scene
command
Word 1902, bit 7
Command Enable Bit
Command
executed
Word 2004, bit 10
Switch Scene
Completed Flag
Word 2002, bit 2
BUSY
317
Section 10-6
Sample Ladder Program
One Measurement
Word 1902, bit 8
One Measurement
Command
Command
executed
Word 2004, bit 12
One Measurement
Completed Flag
Word 2002, bit 2
BUSY
Word 2003
Judgement
318
Section 10-6
Sample Ladder Program
10-6-4 Ladder Program
Switch
000000
DIFU(13)
000001
000001
MOV(030)
#00AF
Switch Scene
Completed Flag
Command to switch
scene to scene 15
1902
200410
Command cleared
MOV(030)
#0000
Switch Scene
Completed Flag
200410
1902
001001
001000
001000
001000
BUSY
200202
MOV(030)
#0100
Command to make
one measurement
1902
One Measurement Completed Flag
001001
200412
Command cleared
MOV(030)
#0000
1902
MOV(030)
Judgement
2003
D01000
319
SECTION 11
RS-232C Menu Operation Settings
This section describes the communications settings for the RS-232C port when communications are in Menu operation mode. Menu operation mode allows F150 menus to be
manipulated from a computer or other external device via the RS-232C port.
321
Section
RS-232C Menu Operation Settings
11
Make the same communications settings for the F150 and the
external device. Set the F150 to Menu operation mode.
The measurement results will be output in Normal mode format
in Menu operation mode. However, Xon/off flow control cannot
be used (CTRL+S and CTRL+Q codes coincide).
Settings
Item
Settings
Use the same
settings on the
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
computer.
Baud rate
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200,
38,400* (bps)
Data length
7, 8* (bits)
Parity bits
None*, even, odd
Stop bits
1*, 2 (bits)
Delimiter
CR*, LF, CR+LF
Mode
Select Menu (possible settings: Normal*, Host
link, and Menu operation mode).
Note The default settings are marked with asterisks.*
RS-232C Inputs Corresponding to Console Keys
The key codes shown in the right column in the following table
can be input from an external device to perform the same functions as the Console keys shown on the left.
RS-232C input
Console key
Key
Code
ESC
CTRL + [
($1B)
TRIG
CTRL + A
($01)
ENT
CTRL + M
($0D)
SHIFT + ESC
CTRL + I, Tab
($09)
SHIFT +TRIG
CTRL + T
($14)
SHIFT +ENT
CTRL + R
($12)
Up Key
CTRL + E
($05)
Down Key
CTRL + X
($18)
Left Key
CTRL + S
($13)
Right Key
CTRL + D
($04)
SHIFT +Up Key
CTRL + W
($17)
SHIFT +Down Key
CTRL + Z
($1A)
SHIFT +Left Key
CTRL + F
($06)
SHIFT +Right Key
CTRL + H
($08)
--- (see note)
CTRL + Q
($11)
Note CTRL + Q changes the RS-232C input to Normal mode. (Can only be input in Monitor or Run mode.)
322
Section 11
RS-232C Menu Operation Settings
Procedure
1 Display the Basic Screen for Monitor mode or Run mode.
Scn 0 B MON B
----
--- ms
Freeze
2 Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT Key.
Scn 0 B MON B
---
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Freeze
3 Select SYS.
323
RS-232C Menu Operation Settings
4 Select Communications.
System settings
Communications
Output
Device settings
Display
Set key operation
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
5 Select RS-232C.
System settings
Communications
Output RS-232C
Device settings
Normal
Display Host link
Set key operation
Terminal block
Switch menu
Startup mode
Error method
Version
6 Set the items.
7 Select End to enter the settings.
324
Section
11
SECTION 12
Troubleshooting
This section lists the errors that may occur during F150 operation, along with their probable
causes and remedies.
325
Section
Troubleshooting
Message
Camera is not connected.*
12
Probable Cause and Countermeasure
Check the following:
· Camera Cables are connected properly.
· Both Cameras are connected when two Cameras are
used.
Cannot measure the angle
from one region.
Select a region for which binary center of gravity and axis
angle has been set as the measurement method.
Communications error.*
Turn OFF the power to the F150 and restart. If the same
error message appears, it may mean that the F150 is
faulty. Contact your OMRON representative.
Set density so that the
upper >/= the lower.
Set so that the lower limit of the density is smaller than
the upper limit.
Draw at least one OR
figure.
NOT mode is used to delete part of a drawn diagram.
Host link error. Change to
normal mode.
(see note)
After checking for the following items, either change the
RS-232C mode to Host Link mode, or restart the F150:
· Draw diagrams in OR mode.
· The Programmable Controller is ON.
· The RS-232C cable is connected properly.
· The communications specifications for the Programmable Controller and the F150 are the same.
Illegal syntax in expression.
Check the following for the expression:
· There are the same number of right and left parentheses.
· There is not more than one operator in a row without a
variable in between them.
· There is not more than one function in a row without a
variable in between them.
· There is not more than one region number in a row.
· There is not more than one constant in a row.
· There are not too many, or too few arguments for a
function.
Incorrect data format
received.*
There is a mistake in the data for which transfer between
the F150 and the external device was attempted. Turn
OFF the power to the F150, and check for the following
items before restarting the F150.
· The RS-232C cable is connected properly.
· The terminal block is wired correctly.
If the same error message appears after restart, it may
mean that the F150 is faulty. Contact your OMRON
representative.
326
Section
Troubleshooting
Message
Insufficient flash memory.
12
Probable Cause and Countermeasure
An error has occurred in flash memory. Data cannot be
saved because of insufficient available flash memory.
· Either make the region to be registered smaller, or clear
unneeded regions from memory.
If the same error message appears after the regions have
been reduced, it may mean that flash memory is faulty.
Contact your OMRON representative.
Insufficient work memory.
No more regions can be registered because of insufficient
available work memory.
· Either make the model or region to be registered
smaller, or clear unneeded models or regions.
Intelligent Lighting is not
selected.
In SYS/Device settings, make the settings required for
using an Intelligent Light Source.
Programmable Controller is
not in monitor mode.*
Change the mode of the Programmable Controller to
Monitor mode.
Select midpoint between 2
regions for X and Y.
If the relative angle of the 2 regions is set for the position
compensation setting q, the midpoint of the 2 regions
must be set for X and Y.
· Either set midpoint of 2 regions for X and Y, or change
the q setting.
Select same region number
for q, X and Y.
If position compensation region 0 or 1 is set for q, then X
and Y must be set to the same region number.
· Either set the same region number for X and Y, or
change the q setting.
Set parameters so that
Output Period
Gate ON
delay + Gate ON time.
Setting calibration
parameters is failed.
The communications specifications for the terminal block
are set incorrectly.
· Make the settings so that output period
delay + GATE ON time.
GATE ON
The Camera magnification is outside the permitted setting
range.
· Re-perform sampling so that the magnification is in the
range 0.01 to 9.999.
Sampling has only been performed once.
· Perform sampling in at least 2 places.
327
Section
Troubleshooting
Message
This region is not drawn.
12
Probable Cause and Countermeasure
A region that has not been drawn is selected as a
displacement direction setting.
· Either draw the region, or select a region that has been
drawn.
Timeout error.*
Data transfer has been interrupted due to a timeout error
in communications between the F150 and an external
device. Turn OFF the power to the F150, and check for
the following items before restarting the F150.
· The RS-232C cable is connected properly.
· The terminal block is wired correctly.
· The communications specifications for the external
device and the F150 are the same.
If the same error message appears after restart, it may
mean that the F150 is faulty. Contact your OMRON
representative.
Note When the error messages marked with an asterisk are displayed, the ERR terminal will come ON.
328
Appendix A
Version Information
This appendix gives details of the functions that have been added as a result of software upgrading and provides information about data compatibility with previous
versions of the software.
Data Compatibility
Scene Data
· Ver. 1.jj (F150-C10E) data cannot be used with this version.
· Ver. 2.jj (F150-C10E-2, F150-C15E-2, F150-C10E-2-DRT) data can be used
with this version.
System Data
· Ver. 1.jj (F150-C10E) data cannot be used with this version.
· Ver. 2.jj (F150-C10E-2, F150-C15E-2, F150-C10E-2-DRT) data can be used
with this version.
Functions (Ver. 2.1j to Ver. 3.0j)
Two Cameras with One Controller
With this version, by connecting a Two-camera Unit (F150-A20), two Cameras can
be operated from just one Controller, and two images can be taken simultaneously.
The default menu configuration is for operation with one Camera and so before
using two Cameras, it is necessary to change the menu configuration. ® p. 29
Light Control Menu
With this version, a menu for controlling light level has been added under Set/Adjust. When an Intelligent Light Source (F150-LTC20/LTC50) is used, this menu
allows the light level to be controlled from the F150. RS-232C and CompoBus/D
commands have been added that allow the light level to be controlled in this way
from external devices. ® p. 41, 59
Density Averaging and Relative Search
Two more measurement methods, density averaging and relative search, have
been added with this version. ® p. 10, 108, 112
Noise Level Added to Edge Detection Conditions
It is now possible to set a noise level that determines the existence of edges and so
erroneous edge detection is reduced. ® p. 93
329
Appendix A
Version Information
Results Display Selection Increased
The following 5 items have been added to Display result under SYS/Display settings, enabling measurement results to be confirmed and judgement conditions to
be adjusted with greater ease. In addition, the results of position compensation can
be viewed in All results of regions. ® p. 140
None
Position compensation
All results of regions
All positions of regions
Individual region
All judges
Individual judge
All data
Individual data
I/O monitor
[Region]
[Judge]
[Data]
[All]
The results of position compensation
have been added to All results of
regions.
Five new items have been added.
Use I/O monitor to display the
contents of I/O. Use Region,
Judge, Data, and All to cyclically
display data both individually and
as a list.
Console Key Allocations
With this version, it is possible to change the functions assigned to the Console
Keys in Monitor mode and Run mode. ® p. 167
Output of Measurement Results via Terminal Block
(F150-C10E-3, F150-C15E-3)
With the previous version, only judgement results could be output to the terminal
block. With this version, however, data can also be output. Select Terminal block
as the output destination in SYS/Output. ® p. 155
Set the actual contents of data output in Expressions/Data. ® p. 121
330
Appendix A
Version Information
New Mode for Data Backup
A new mode, Tool mode, has been added. Select this menu to immediately display a
menu showing the different kinds of data that can be saved. In addition, when saving image data, select the images to be be saved from memory numbers displayed.
Scn 0 B MON B
---
--- ms
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Freeze
Scn 0 = TOOL =
Load system data
Save system data
Load scene data
Save scene data
Load sys+scn data
Save sys+scn data
Load image data
Save image data
Freeze
331
Index
A
C
calibration, 3
ABS, 126
all data, 147
all judges, 146
all positions of regions, 145
allocations, 315, 318
ANGL, 127
ATAN, 127
B
background suppression
object measurement, 49
position compensation, 64
backup, 177
baud rate
CompoBus/D, 277
menu operation, 324
RS-232C (host link), 236
RS-232C (normal), 200
binary center of gravity and area
object measurement, 82
output expressions, 124
overview, 4
parameter lists, 214, 218, 246, 249, 259,
286, 289, 298
position compensation, 66
binary center of gravity and axis angle
object measurement, 82
output expressions, 124
overview, 5
parameter lists, 214, 218, 246, 249, 259,
286, 289, 298
position compensation, 67
binary level
object measurement, 83
position compensation, 68
camera modes, 34
Camera 0/1 modes, 39
changing, 40
commands
See also CompoBus/D commands;
RS-232C (host link) commands;
RS-232C (normal) commands; terminal blocks commands
measurement, 198
non-measurement, 200
communications
errors, 274
flowcharts
RS-232C (host link), 232
RS-232C (normal), 198
mode
RS-232C (host link), 236
RS-232C (normal), 200
monitoring I/O, 148
settings
CompoBus/D, 273
menu operation, 324
RS-232C (host link), 232, 236
RS-232C (normal), 200
terminal blocks, 184
specifications, 17
compare pitch, 107
CompoBus/D, 3
commands
Continuous Measurement, 279, 283
Decrement Scene, 284
Increment Scene, 284
Model Register, 280, 285
One Measurement, 278, 283
Read Data Output Expression Result,
299
Read Judgement Output Expression Criteria, 294
Read Judgement Output Expression Result, 299
Read Light Level, 295
Read Measurement, 285
Read Parameter, 293
Read Position, 296
333
Index
Read Scene Number, 284
Reset, 281, 285
Save Data, 285
Set Judgement Output Expression Criteria, 294
Set Light Level, 295
Set Parameter, 289
Stop Measurement, 279, 283
Switch Scene, 279, 284
measurement results, 281
operation, 281
settings, 269, 282
console keys, 22
changing allocations, 169
combinations, 24
coordinates, obtaining, 224
cursor, 24
drawing mode, 28
E
edge pitch
object measurement, 95
output expressions, 125
overview, 8
parameter lists, 214, 219, 247, 250, 288,
291
edges
enhancement. See filtering
extraction. See filtering
element size, 107
errors, 274
troubleshooting, 327
D
data
compatibility between versions, 331
loading, 206
image data, 210
scenes, 178
system data, 178, 228
output destination, 123
output expressions, 129
saving, 206, 207, 244, 285
image data, 210
scenes, 178
system data, 178, 229
scene data
clearing, 135
copying, 134
data areas. See memory areas
defect, calculation, 107
density averaging, 331
object measurement, 108
output expressions, 124
overview, 10
parameter lists, 215, 220, 247, 251, 287,
291
DIP switch settings, Intelligent Light Source,
43
direction, position compensation, 77
334
DIST, 127
evaluation criteria, setting, 80, 88, 103, 112,
118
expressions
output, 122
possible settings, 123
F
features, 2
filtering
object measurement, 48
position compensation, 64
flash memory, 181
flow control, RS-232C (normal), 203
functions
display, 24
output expressions, 126
upgrades, 331
G
GATE terminal, 280, 282, 300
gray edge position
object measurement, 91
output expressions, 124
overview, 7
Index
parameter lists, 215, 218, 246, 249, 258,
287, 290, 297
position compensation, 71
gray search
object measurement, 98
output expressions, 125
overview, 6
parameter lists, 215, 219, 247, 250, 259,
287, 290, 298
position compensation, 73
input terminals
for continuous measurement, 192
non-measurement commands, 194, 195
using STEP signal, 190
installation, overview, 16
Intelligent Light Source, 41
adjusting light level, 59, 212
lighting control, 331
monitoring light level, 211
settings, 158
H--I
handshaking
with, 193
without, 189
Horizontal Composition modes, 38
host link, commands. See RS-232C (host
link) commands
I/O formats. See input format; output format
I/O monitor, 148
images
adjusting, 47
for position compensation, 64
changing, 166
overview, 3
storing, 162, 207
types displayed, 24
J--L
JG, 127
judgement
output, 304
output expressions, 122, 129, 209
keys. See console keys
ladder diagram, 267, 321
lighting control, 2, 331
adjusting light level, 59, 212, 256, 295
Intelligent Light Source, 41
monitoring light level, 211, 256, 295
loading. See data loading
M
individual data, 147
MAX, 126
individual judge, 147
measurement
continuous, 187, 191
command, 222, 243, 279, 283
timing, 310, 313
enhancement, 2
performing, 152
single
command, 222, 242, 278, 283
timing, 309, 312, 320
stop, command, 222, 243, 283
individual region, 146
input, 17
area, 273, 317
commands, 153
See also CompoBus/D commands;
RS-232C (host link) commands;
RS-232C (normal) commands; terminal blocks commands
devices, overview, 22
DI0 to DI7, 187
format
CompoBus/D, 278, 282
RS-232C (host link), 242
RS-232C (normal), 207
terminal blocks, 187
numeric values, 26
parameters, 55
measurement conditions, 45
measurement images. See images
measurement methods, 4, 80
measurement regions
drawing, 28
functions, 80
measurement results
335
Index
commands
CompoBus/D, 281
RS-232C (host link), 241
RS-232C (normal), 206
displaying, 142
reading, 213, 241, 245, 285
memory areas
allocations, 266
setting, 239
menus
hierarchy, 12
moving around, 25
midpoint, 77
MIN, 126
CompoBus/D, 301
RS-232C (host link), 262
RS-232C (normal), 229
terminal blocks, 188
response, 282, 305
status, 305
output terminals, 188
error terminal, 174
GATE terminal, 280, 282, 300
non-measurement commands, 194
with handshaking, 193, 194
without handshaking
for continuous measurement, 192
using STEP signal, 191
models, registering, 99, 187, 223, 244, 280,
285, 311
modes
camera modes, 34
overview, 24
Monitor mode, 138
monitoring
I/O monitor, 148
regions and results, 149
P
parameters
inputting, 55
position compensation, 225
reading/setting, 216, 248, 253, 289, 293
reference, 58
pixel-skipping parameter, 76, 104, 119
N--O
numeric values. See input
operation
basic, 19
commands
CompoBus/D, 281
RS-232C (host link), 241
RS-232C (normal), 205
timing, 315
menu, 22, 223
overview, 16
output, 17
area, 272, 316
calibration, 50
control output, 303
destinations, 157
expressions, 122
evaluation criteria, 254, 255, 294
functions, 126
reading results, 208, 260, 261, 299
format, 153
336
ports. See terminal blocks
position compensation, 2, 62
direction, 77
displaying results, 144, 224
midpoint, 77
parameter lists, 258, 297
parameters, 225
reading measurement values, 257, 296
relative angle, 77
position displacement compensation. See
position compensation
precautions, general, xi
precise search
object measurement, 98
output expressions, 125
overview, 6
parameter lists, 215, 219, 247, 250, 287,
290
programming, sample, 265, 318
Index
Q--R
quitting, 20
relative angle, 77
relative search, 331
object measurement, 112
output expressions, 126
overview, 10
parameter lists, 216, 221, 248, 252, 288,
292
resetting, 226, 245, 285
response output, 282
RS-232C
inputs, 324
menu operation, 23
settings, 323
RS-232C (host link)
commands
Continuous Measurement, 243
Decrement Scene, 243
Increment Scene, 243
One Measurement, 242
Model Register, 244
Read Data Output Expression Result,
261
Read Judgement Output Expression Criteria, 255
Read Judgement Output Expression Result, 260
Read Light Level, 256
Read Measurement, 245
Read Parameter, 253
Read Position, 257
Read Scene Number, 244
Reset, 245
Save Data, 244
Set Judgement Output Expression Criteria, 254
Set Light Level, 256
Set Parameter, 248
Stop Measurement, 243
Switch Scene, 243
I/O, 233
measurement results, 241
operation, 241
settings, 231, 242
RS-232C (normal)
commands
Data Save, 207
Display Image, 207
Expression, 208
Expression Parameter, 209
Image Load, 210
Image Save, 210
Light Parameter, 211
Measure, 221
Measure Data, 213
Measure Parameter, 216
MENUKEY, 223
Model Set, 223
Position Data, 224
Position Parameter, 225
Reset, 226
Scene, 227
Scene Load, 227
Scene Save, 228
System Load, 228
System Save, 229
Version Get, 229
I/O, 198
measurement results, 206
operation, 205
save/load, 206
settings, 197, 206
Run mode
entering, 151
performing measurement, 152
S
sampling, 51
saving. See data saving
scenes
changing, 2, 132, 187, 243, 279, 284, 311,
319
clearing, 135
copying, 134
data, 227
See also data
loading, 227
number, 24
decrementing, 243, 284
incrementing, 243, 284
reading, 244, 284
saving, 228
screen, display, 23
measurement results, 142
settings, 160
search regions, setting, 102, 116
337
Index
Set mode, 46
settings
changing/clearing, 79, 120
commands
CompoBus/D, 282
RS-232C (host link), 242
RS-232C (normal), 206
displaying, 277
Programmable Controller, 318
shutter speed, 2, 47
smoothing. See filtering
software version, 175, 229, 331
T--W
terminal blocks, 3, 183
commands, 187
terminals
See also input terminals; output terminals
signal operation and timing, 189
test measurement, 139
timing, 309, 319
SQRT, 126
Tool mode, 179, 333
starting, 20
startup scene and mode, 172
troubleshooting, 327
STEP signal
with handshaking, 193
without handshaking, 189, 190
Two-camera Switching mode, 38
STEP terminal, 187
RS-232C (host link), 234
RS-232C (normal), 199
surface defect, 105
output expressions, 125
overview, 9
parameter lists, 215, 220, 247, 253, 287,
293
system, data. See data
System mode, 156
338
Two-camera Unit, 3, 29, 331
menus, 13, 32
settings, 158
TXD instructions, 235
values. See input
version. See software version
Vertical Composition mode, 38
wiring, overview, 16
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover
of the manual.
Cat. No. Z142-E3-1
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision.
Revision code
Date
Z142-E1
April 2000
Z142-E1-1A
October
2000
Z142-E3-1
August 2001
Revised content
Original production
Page 262: Added information on Write Flag to the description above the table.
Page 266: Corrected values in the diagram.
Address: Updated the addresses.
Page 29: corrected one statement near top of page.
339
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 Commerce Drive
Schaumburg, IL 60173 USA
800.55.OMRON (66766)
OMRON CANADA, INC.
885 Milner Avenue
Scarborough, Ontario M1B 5V8
416.286.6465
OMRON ON-LINE
Global - http://www.omron.com
USA - http://www.omron.com/oei
Canada - http://www.omron.com/oci
24 HOUR FAX ON DEMAND
USA - 847.843.1963
Canada - 788.599.4264
800.55.OMRON or 847.843.7900
Sao Paulo
55.11.5564.6488
Buenos Aires
54.114.787.1129
Florida
954.227.2121
Z142-E3-1 08/01
©2001 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement